JP2020073178A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which allows for obtaining an execution state of a setting value from an external device.SOLUTION: A game machine which can be controlled to an advantage state advantageous for a player in accordance with a probability according to a setting value, includes setting mode control means which is controllable for the setting mode in which value setting is possible, and so on; starts outputting a specific signal in accordance with a start of a control of the setting mode; and stops the output of the specific signal in accordance with an end of the control of the setting mode. An output period of the specific signal according to the control of the setting mode is longer than a predetermined period.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9-40

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  As shown in Patent Document 1, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. Further, as shown in Patent Document 2, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board.

JP, 2010-200902, A (paragraph 0007). JP, 2014-500506, A (paragraph 0102).

  Regarding the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it may be necessary for the external device side to grasp the execution status of the processing related to the set value. Even if the signal output technology of the gaming machine is applied, it is difficult for the external device side to grasp this.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above situation, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping the execution status of processing related to set values on the external device side.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention,
A gaming machine which can be controlled by a probability according to a set value in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
An assigning unit that is capable of imparting a game value based on the fact that the game medium has entered a specific area, and is capable of imparting a game value based on a signal output from the gaming device,
And a setting mode control means capable of controlling the setting value to a setting mode capable of setting,
In response to the start of the control of the setting mode, start outputting a specific signal,
Stopping the output of the specific signal in response to the end of the control of the setting mode,
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the control of the setting mode is longer than a predetermined period,
When the game medium is controlled to the setting mode, the addition of the game value due to the game medium entering the specific area is restricted,
When controlled in the setting mode, the granting of a game value based on a signal output from the gaming device is restricted.
With such a configuration, the control state related to the set value can be appropriately notified to the outside of the gaming machine.
(A) Further, in order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention,
A gaming machine which can be controlled by a probability according to a set value in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
An assigning unit that is capable of imparting a game value based on the fact that the game medium has entered a specific area, and is capable of imparting a game value based on a signal output from the gaming device,
And a setting mode control means capable of controlling the setting value to a setting mode capable of setting,
In response to the start of the control of the setting mode, start outputting a specific signal,
Stopping the output of the specific signal in response to the end of the control of the setting mode,
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the control of the setting mode is longer than a predetermined period,
When the game medium is controlled to the setting mode, the addition of the game value due to the game medium entering the specific area is restricted,
When controlled in the setting mode, it is possible to add a gaming value based on a signal output from the gaming device.
With such a configuration, the control state related to the set value can be appropriately notified to the outside of the gaming machine.
(1) A gaming machine according to another aspect,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
A title notifying unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestive effect,
The title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of production.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of the suggestive effect,
In a plurality of types of the suggested effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be executable in a common mode (for example, FIG. 8-2 (C)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to which suggestive effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
At a plurality of execution timings during execution of the suggestive effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a notice effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
The execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
With such a configuration, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation even after the notification of the title.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The suggestive effect execution means executes at least a first suggestive effect (for example, reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestive effect (for example, reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestive effect. Is possible,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notifying unit may notify the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.
According to such a configuration, since the notification of the title according to the suggestive effect can be executed, the effect of the effect is improved.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above,
The rate of control to the advantageous state may be higher when the first suggestive effect is executed than when the second suggestive effect is executed.
With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The suggestion effect executing means may be capable of executing the suggestion effect in an effect mode related to the title notified in the predetermined period.
With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
Detection means capable of detecting the movement of the player (for example, the stick controller 31A or push button 31B),
A specific display execution unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for performing a specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection unit,
The specific display execution means,
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) are displayed. Is possible,
In the ineffective period of the detection by the detection means, after the first specific display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 8-10 (E), FIG. 8-11 (I). )),
During the effective period of the detection by the detection means, the action effect using the changed second specific display may be executed (for example, FIGS. 8-11 (J) and (K)).
With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
As a suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, a first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (the shutter image 31AK061 of the first size displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. 8-12 (a)) Display, etc.) and a second suggestion display whose display size is the second size (such as the second size reach title image 31AK062 displayed at the time of the reach title effect shown in FIG. 8-12 (d)). Means (for example, image display device 5, CPU 120 for effect control),
The display means is
A plurality of types of elements having different aspects (element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry) shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d)) It is possible to display a specific image (such as the fruit pattern shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d)) including the above),
When displaying either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display in a pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. 8-12 (a) and 8 (d), the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d) may include the elements E1 to E5.
With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the specific image regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. This makes it possible to accurately notify that the specific image has been displayed.

  Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing the setting value, it is necessary to appropriately execute the control relating to the addition of the game medium. The invention according to means A1 to means A9 is made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control relating to application of a game medium.

The game machine of means A1 is
A gaming device capable of executing processing related to valuable value (prepaid balance, ball holdings, accumulated balls, etc.) (processing relating to ball lending that consumes prepaid balance, ball lending that consumes balls, ball lending that consumes accumulated balls, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from (card unit 21TM050),
An awarding means (a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling a payout motor 21TM289) for giving a game medium based on a signal output from the gaming device;
Specific control means (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for big hit determination) capable of executing specific control means (step S21TM1690, etc.) A control microcomputer 100),
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting change mode capable of changing the setting value;
Equipped with
When the setting change mode is controlled, the addition of the game medium based on the signal output from the game device is restricted (1. The game control microcomputer 100 when the setting change mode is controlled). Does not turn on the connection confirmation signal (does not output to the payout control board 21TM037), 2. When the game control microcomputer 100 does not send the connection confirmation command while being controlled in the setting change mode, the payout control microcomputer The computer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal 3. When the gaming machine frame open sensor detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal. No 4. When playing in the setting change mode Even if the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the BRQ signal is turned on because the black computer 100 does not send the connection check command (because the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not receive the connection check command), the EXS signal is output. Do not turn on.)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the setting change mode is controlled, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the addition of the game medium.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, when the power switch 21TM055 is operated and the operating voltage is supplied to the main board 11, the gaming control microcomputer 100 turns on the lock switch 21TM051. And the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, the control is controlled to the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed. During the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, since the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 is not executed, the connection confirmation signal is not output to the payout control board 21TM037, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is Do not lend a ball.

The game machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process) that has the specific control means and the setting change mode control means and controls the progress of a game in the gaming machine,
The game control means has a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed,
The giving means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) can give a game medium when a special signal (connection confirmation signal) is inputted from the game control means,
The game control means does not output the special signal when being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 for outputting a connection confirmation signal is a setting change). Will be executed after the mode ends and after the setting confirmation mode ends),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being added while being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means A3,
A gaming machine of means A1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The giving means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) outputs a first predetermined signal (PRDY signal) to the game device, and the game device is based on the input of the first predetermined signal. The game medium can be added based on the input of the second predetermined signal (BRDY signal) output from
When the control is in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the first predetermined signal is not output (1. The PRDY signal is not turned on when the connection confirmation signal is not input, 2. Connection confirmation When the command is not received, the PRDY signal is not turned on),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being added while being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means A4,
A gaming machine of means A1,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process) that has the specific control means and the setting change mode control means and controls the progress of a game in the gaming machine,
At least one of the game control means and the giving means (for example, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) has an open state detecting means for detecting an open state in which a game machine frame or a door frame corresponding to the game machine is opened ( A gaming machine frame opening sensor that can detect that the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, and a gaming machine frame that includes a door frame opening sensor that can detect that the glass door frame 3a is in an open state. Door frame opening sensor 21TM300) is provided,
Regardless of whether it is controlled to the setting change mode or not, the application of the game medium is restricted when the open state is detected (when the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the glass door frame 3a). Does not turn on the PRDY signal when is open),
It is characterized by
According to this, when the game machine frame or the door frame is opened to control the setting change mode, it is possible to restrict the addition of the game medium.

The game machine of means A5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means A1 to means A4,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The grant means outputs a grant preparation signal (turns the EXS signal on) in response to the grant request signal being input from the gaming device (the BRQ signal being turned on), and the grant preparation signal When a grant command signal output from the gaming device in response to an input is input (when the card unit 21TM050 that detects ON of the EXS signal turns off the BRQ signal), the game medium is granted.
When being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the grant preparation signal is not output even if the grant request signal is input (the EXS signal is turned on even when the ON of the BRQ signal is detected. do not do),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being added while being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means A6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means A1 to means A5,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means, when the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting change switch). ) 21TM052 is on), control to the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means, when the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting switch) ) When 21TM052 is off), control to the setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The game machine of means A7 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means A1 to means A6,
When controlled in the setting change mode, the game state is initialized (RAM clear of step S21TM1410 is executed),
After executing the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode based on the end of the control of the setting change mode (after making the display monitor 21TM029 blink the set value), the game state is initialized. To notify that (display the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by
According to this, the clerk or the like of the game hall can understand that the control of the setting change mode is finished and the game state is initialized.

The game machine of means A8 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means A1 to means A7,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) that has the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controls the progress of a game in the game machine.
And a production control means (CPU 120 for production control) for controlling execution of production,
The game control means further has a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed.
The game control means outputs a command (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control related to notification according to the command (displays “setting changing” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received, and when a setting confirmation mode command is received) "Displaying setting confirmation" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible for the store clerk or the like in the game arcade to know that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

The game machine of means A9 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means A1 to means A8,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
With the control in the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (if the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear process of step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is set. Due to the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, RAM clear processing of step S21TM1410 is performed only when it is determined to be NO in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this, the store clerk or the like in the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and also whether or not to initialize the game state.

  Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing the set value, it is necessary to appropriately execute control based on a signal output from the gaming device. The inventions relating to the means B1 to B7 are made in view of the above situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control based on a signal output from a gaming device.

The game machine of means B1 is
A gaming device capable of executing processing related to valuable value (prepaid balance, ball holdings, accumulated balls, etc.) (processing relating to ball lending that consumes prepaid balance, ball lending that consumes balls, ball lending that consumes accumulated balls, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from (card unit 21TM050),
A predetermined control means (a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) for executing a predetermined control (ball lending) based on a signal output from the gaming device;
Specific control means (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for big hit determination) capable of executing specific control means (step S21TM1690, etc.) A control microcomputer 100),
And a setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode capable of changing the setting value,
Regardless of whether it is controlled in the setting change mode, it is possible to execute a predetermined control based on a signal output from the gaming device (the gaming control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting change mode). Even during the period, the connection confirmation signal can be turned on, the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command can be transmitted, and the payout control for which the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command are received while the connection confirmation signal is on The microcomputer 21TM370 can execute the ball lending irrespective of whether or not the period is controlled in the setting change mode),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately execute the predetermined control based on the signal output from the gaming device, and it is possible to avoid the control load when the predetermined control is not executed while being controlled in the setting change mode. .

The game machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
When the predetermined control (power interruption, etc.) occurs while the predetermined control is being executed, the predetermined control is interrupted, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is subsequently controlled, the setting is changed. After the end of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the predetermined control is restarted (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 interrupts the ball lending when the power is cut off during the execution of the ball lending, and restarts the power supply. When the game control microcomputer 100 shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball lending is restarted after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode without immediately restarting the ball lending),
It is characterized by
According to this, the predetermined control can be appropriately executed even when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the predetermined event occurs.

The game machine of means B3 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
When the setting control mode is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode while executing the predetermined control, the predetermined control is ended (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is powered off during the execution of the ball lending. When it occurs, the ball lending is forcibly terminated (stopped), and when the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, the ball lending is not restarted and the setting is changed. Ball lending will not be resumed even after the mode or setting confirmation mode ends),
It is characterized by
According to this, the control for restarting the predetermined control after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode becomes unnecessary, and the predetermined control can be simplified.

The game machine of means B4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means B1 to means B3,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means, when the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is also in the ON state). In case), control to the setting change mode,
When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state). In case), control to the setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by
According to this, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be controlled according to the condition established when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The game machine of means B5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means B1 to means B4,
When the setting change mode is controlled, the game information is initialized (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear of step S21TM1410 is executed),
When the set value is changed in the setting change mode, after the change of the set value is notified (after the set value is blinked on the display monitor 21TM029), it is notified that the game state is initialized (display). Display the letter "C" on the monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by
According to this, the clerk or the like of the game hall can understand that the control of the setting change mode is finished and the game state is initialized.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means B1 to means B5,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) that has the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controls the progress of a game in the game machine.
And a production control means (CPU 120 for production control) for controlling execution of production,
The game control means further has a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed.
The game control means outputs a command (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control related to notification according to the command (displays “setting changing” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received, and when a setting confirmation mode command is received) "Displaying setting confirmation" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible for the store clerk or the like in the game arcade to know that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

The game machine of means B7 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means B1 to means B6,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
With the control in the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (if the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear process of step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is set. Due to the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, RAM clear processing of step S21TM1410 is performed only when it is determined to be NO in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this, the store clerk or the like in the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and also whether or not to initialize the game state.

  Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In the gaming machine as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), when changing the setting value, it is necessary to appropriately execute the control when the game medium passes through the specific area. The invention relating to means C1 to means C6 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control when a game medium passes through a specific area.

The gaming machine of means C1 is
Based on that the game medium has passed through the specific area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening), specific control according to the set value (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges for jackpot determination random numbers) (special Specific control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes processing such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing jackpot determination processing in the symbol process processing),
And a setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode capable of changing the setting value,
When the setting change mode is controlled, the specific control is not executed even if the game medium passes through the specific area (the setting change mode is controlled before the timer interrupt setting (step S21TM1500)). Thus, during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, the special symbol process process (big hit determination process) of step S21TM1690 is not executed),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed when the set value may be changed.

The gaming machine of means C2 is
A gaming machine of means C1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means, when the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is also in the ON state). In case), control to the setting change mode,
When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state). In case), control to the setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by
According to this, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be controlled according to the condition established when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The gaming machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
When the setting change mode is controlled, the game state is initialized (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear of step S21TM1410 is executed),
After executing the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode based on the end of the control of the setting change mode (after making the display monitor 21TM029 blink the set value), the game state is initialized. To notify that (display the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by
According to this, the clerk or the like of the game hall can understand that the control of the setting change mode is finished and the game state is initialized.

The gaming machine of means C4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to C3,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) that has the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controls the progress of a game in the game machine.
And a production control means (CPU 120 for production control) for controlling execution of production,
The game control means further has a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed.
The game control means outputs a command (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control related to notification according to the command (displays “setting changing” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received, and when a setting confirmation mode command is received) "Displaying setting confirmation" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible for the store clerk or the like in the game arcade to know that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

The gaming machine of means C5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means C1 to means C4,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
When controlled in the setting confirmation mode, the specific control is not executed even if the game medium passes through the specific area (the setting confirmation mode is controlled before the timer interrupt setting (step S21TM1500)). Therefore, during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the special symbol process process (big hit determination process) of step S21TM1690 is not executed),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed while the set value is being confirmed.

The gaming machine of means C6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means C1 to means C5,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
With the control in the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (if the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear process of step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is set. Due to the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, RAM clear processing of step S21TM1410 is performed only when it is determined to be NO in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this, the store clerk or the like in the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and also whether or not to initialize the game state.

  Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In the gaming machine as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to execute appropriate processing when the power supply is stopped when changing the setting value. The invention according to means D1 to means D5 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that executes appropriate processing when power supply is stopped.

The game machine of means D1 is
Specific control means (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for big hit determination) capable of executing specific control means (step S21TM1690, etc.) A control microcomputer 100),
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting change mode capable of changing the setting value;
Setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode for confirming the setting value.
A setting value storage means for storing the setting value (a setting value storage area of the RAM 102 for storing the setting value);
The setting change mode control means satisfies the first condition (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and the second condition when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (clear switch ( The setting change switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state) to control the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means satisfies the first condition (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and does not satisfy the second condition when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (clear). The setting confirmation mode is controlled based on the fact that the switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state,
The set value is determined based on a specific operation in the setting change mode (operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state),
The set value storage means stores the set value before being controlled in the setting change mode while being controlled in the setting change mode (stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 before the shift to the setting change mode). The set values that have been set are continuously stored without changing as the mode changes to the setting change mode),
In the setting change mode, the power supply to the game machine is stopped without performing the specific operation (the power is cut off without performing the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state), and thereafter. When the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted, the setting value stored in the setting value storage means is notified (the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is turned on). If so, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 before the shift to the setting confirmation mode is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by
According to this, the store clerk or the like in the game arcade can appropriately set the set value when the power supply is stopped while being controlled in the setting change mode.

The game machine of means D2 is
A gaming machine of means D1,
The setting change mode control means performs a transition operation (operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051) and an initialization operation (turns on the clear switch 21TM052 to ON state when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Control) to control the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode when the transition operation is performed when the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the initialization operation is not performed,
It is characterized by
According to this, a store clerk or the like at the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control.

The game machine of means D3 is
A gaming machine of means D1 or means D2,
When controlled in the setting change mode, the game state is initialized (RAM clear of step S21TM1410 is executed),
On the basis of the end of the control of the setting change mode, a notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is executed (the set value is displayed blinking on display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by
According to this, the store clerk or the like in the game arcade can know that the control of the setting change mode has ended.

The game machine of means D4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means D1 to means D3,
Game control means having the specific control means, the setting change mode control means, and the setting confirmation mode control means, for controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine (a game control micro that executes a game control timer interrupt process) Computer 100),
And a production control means (CPU 120 for production control) that executes control of production,
The game control means outputs a command (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes a notification according to the command (displays “setting changing” on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode command is received, and displays an image when the setting confirmation mode command is received. "Displaying setting confirmation" is displayed on the device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible for the store clerk or the like in the game arcade to know that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

The game machine of means D5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means D1 to means D4,
Timing after power supply to the game machine is started (timing after the game control microcomputer 100 can execute the game control timer interrupt process after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends) Then, when the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, a predetermined notification is given (the CPU 120 for effect control is a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated, a clear switch (setting change switch). ) When the setting change switch operation command indicating that 21TM052 has been operated is received from the game control microcomputer 100, "the operation of the lock switch has been detected." And "the operation of the setting change switch has been detected." Is displayed on the image display device 5).
It is characterized by
According to this, the clerk or the like of the game arcade can grasp that the first condition or the second condition is satisfied at the timing after the power supply is started.

  Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-500506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device side to grasp the status of the processing related to the change of the setting value. Even if the signal output technique of the conventional game machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, it is difficult for the external device side to grasp this. The invention according to means E1 to E8 has been made in view of the above situation, and provides a gaming machine capable of grasping the status of the processing related to the change of the set value on the external device side. is there.

The gaming machine of the means E1 is
A game machine capable of executing a specific control (a big hit determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 having different ranges of big hit determination random numbers),
The set value can be changed (it can be changed based on the operation in the setting change mode),
It is possible to output a specific signal (security signal) from the first terminal (tenth terminal) in response to a predetermined event (abnormal winning, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) that has occurred in the gaming machine,
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change corresponding signal) from the second terminal (seventh terminal) in response to the processing (change to setting change mode, change to setting confirmation mode) related to the change of the set value. ,
It is characterized by
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be notified to the outside in a distinguishable manner.

The game machine of means E2 is
A gaming machine of means E1,
The specific signal can be output in response to the start of power supply to the gaming machine (a security signal is output when the RAM clear is executed),
A setting change mode control means (step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200 capable of executing the game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling the setting value to change the setting value when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Prepare,
When controlled to the setting change mode, both the specific signal and the special signal can be output (a security signal and a setting correspondence change signal are output at the same time),
It is characterized by
According to this, since it is possible to notify the outside that at least the setting change mode may have been controlled by the specific signal, even in the conventional external device that does not assume the input of the special signal, the setting can be changed by the specific signal. It is possible to understand that the mode may have been controlled.

The gaming machine of means E3 is
A gaming machine of means E2,
When both the specific signal and the special signal are output based on being controlled in the setting change mode, the output period of the specific signal is longer than the output period of the special signal (output of the setting correspondence change signal Security signal is continuously output for 30 seconds after the end of),
It is characterized by
According to this, since it is possible to notify the outside that at least the setting change mode may be controlled by the specific signal, even if the conventional external device that does not assume the input of the special signal is set by the specific signal. It is possible to understand that the change mode may be controlled.

The game machine of means E4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means E1 to E3,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The special signal can be output based on the control in the setting confirmation mode (the setting correspondence change signal is output during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside that the setting confirmation mode may have been controlled.

The game machine of means E5 is
A gaming machine of means E4,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the setting confirmation mode can be controlled (the lock switch 21TM051 was in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 was in the OFF state when the power was turned on. Based on that, it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode),
It is possible to output both the specific signal and the special signal based on being controlled in the setting confirmation mode (a security signal and a setting correspondence change signal are simultaneously output),
It is characterized by
According to this, since it is possible to notify the outside that at least the setting confirmation mode may have been controlled by the specific signal, the setting confirmation can be confirmed by the specific signal even in the conventional external device that does not assume the input of the special signal. It is possible to understand that the mode may have been controlled.

The game machine of means E6 is
A gaming machine of means E1,
A setting change mode control means (step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200 capable of executing the game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling the setting value to change the setting value when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Prepare,
The special signal can be output when the setting change mode is controlled (the setting change corresponding signal is output when the setting change mode is controlled), and the specific signal can be output when the setting change mode ends. (When the RAM clear is executed, a security signal is output when the setting change mode ends),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside of the occurrence of the predetermined event while simplifying the signal output processing when the setting change mode is controlled.

The game machine of means E7 is
A gaming machine of means E1 or means E6,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Prepare,
The special signal can be output when the setting confirmation mode is controlled (the setting change corresponding signal is output when the setting confirmation mode is controlled), and the specific signal can be output when the setting confirmation mode ends. (When the RAM clear is executed, a security signal is output when the setting confirmation mode ends),
It is characterized by
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event can be notified to the outside while simplifying the signal output processing when the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

The game machine of means E8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means E1 to E7,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting change mode capable of changing the setting value;
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
In the setting change mode, the setting value can be changed according to the setting change operation (the setting value can be changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 and the lock switch 21TM051),
When the setting change operation is performed when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, predetermined notification is given (the CPU 120 for effect control operates the lock switch 21TM051). When a lock switch operation command indicating that, and a setting switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 has been operated are received from the game control microcomputer 100, "the operation of the lock switch has been detected. , "" The operation of the setting changeover switch was detected. "Is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this, the clerk or the like of the game arcade can recognize that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

  Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-500506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device side to grasp the information related to the set value, but JP 2014-200506 A. Even if the signal output technique of the conventional game machine described in Japanese Patent Publication (paragraph 0102) is applied, it is difficult for the external device side to grasp this. The invention relating to the means F1 to F11 is made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping information related to set values on the external device side.

The game machine of means F1 is
A game machine capable of executing a specific control (a big hit determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 having different ranges of big hit determination random numbers),
The set value can be changed to any one of a plurality of values (it can be changed based on an operation in the setting change mode),
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change corresponding signal) in response to the processing related to the change of the set value (transition to the setting change mode, transition to the setting confirmation mode),
It is possible to output the special signal in a special mode capable of specifying the set value (output a number of pulses corresponding to the set value),
It is characterized by
According to this, it becomes possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The game machine of means F2 is
A gaming machine of means F1,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to be able to change the setting value is provided.
Outputs the special signal in the special mode with the end of the setting change mode (when the setting change mode ends, outputs a number of pulses corresponding to the confirmed set value),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to output a signal notifying whether the setting change mode is controlled and a signal notifying the setting value of the gaming machine from the common terminal.

The game machine of means F3 is
A gaming machine of means F2,
When the setting change mode is controlled, a non-special mode special signal (a setting change corresponding signal that is in an ON state during the setting change mode control period) is output, and when the setting change mode ends After the output of the special signal is once stopped (the setting change corresponding signal is once turned off at the end of the setting change mode), the special signal of the special mode (the number of pulse-like settings corresponding to the confirmed set value is set) Change corresponding signal) is output,
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside by the special signal whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, and it is also possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The game machine of means F4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means F1 to means F3,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
Outputting a special signal in the special mode with the end of the setting confirmation mode (when the setting confirmation mode ends, outputs a number of pulses corresponding to the displayed set value),
It is characterized by
According to this, it becomes possible to output from the common terminal a signal notifying whether the setting confirmation mode is controlled and a signal notifying the setting value of the gaming machine.

The game machine of means F5 is
A gaming machine of means F4,
When the setting confirmation mode is controlled, a special signal in a non-special mode (a setting change corresponding signal which is in the ON state during the period when the setting confirmation mode is controlled) is output. After the output of the special signal is temporarily stopped (the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off at the end of the setting confirmation mode), the special signal of the special mode (the number of pulse-shaped signals corresponding to the displayed set value is changed). Output the setting change correspondence signal),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to notify to the outside whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled by the special signal, and it is also possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The game machine of means F6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from means F1 to means F5,
In the special signal of the special mode, the set value can be specified by the number of pulses (the set value can be specified by an external device by setting the number of output times of the pulse-shaped setting change corresponding signal to the same number as the set value. is there),
It is characterized by
According to this, the setting value can be easily specified in the external device.

The game machine of means F7 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means F1 to means F6,
It is possible to output a specific signal (security signal) in response to a predetermined event (abnormal winning, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) that has occurred in the gaming machine.
It is characterized by
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event can be notified to the outside.

The game machine of means F8 is
A gaming machine of means F7,
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from a common terminal (for example, output from a tenth terminal),
It is characterized by
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the set value can be notified to the outside with a simple configuration.

The gaming machine of means F9 is
A gaming machine of means F7,
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from different terminals (for example, the security signal is output from the tenth terminal and the setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal),
It is characterized by
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the set value can be notified to the outside in a clearly distinguishable manner.

The gaming machine of means F10 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means F1 to means F9,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to be able to change the setting value is provided.
In the setting change mode, the set value can be changed according to the setting change operation (the set value can be changed according to the operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052),
Regardless of whether or not the setting change operation is performed in the setting change mode, the special signal of the special mode is output when the setting change mode ends (when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, Regardless of whether the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated previously, the number of pulses corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is output as a setting change corresponding signal) ,
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the signal output processing by executing the common signal output processing regardless of whether or not the setting change operation is actually performed.

The gaming machine of means F11 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means F1 to means F10,
The special signal of the special mode is output upon completion of the processing related to the change of the set value (the number of pulse-shaped signals corresponding to the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 upon completion of the setting change mode). Output the setting change corresponding signal of, and output the pulse-like setting change corresponding signal of the number corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 at the end of the setting confirmation mode). After the output is finished, the special signal of the special mode is output (stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) at a predetermined trigger (for example, the end of the big hit game state) different from the process related to the change of the set value. The number of pulse-like setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the set value that is being output),
It is characterized by
According to this, since it becomes possible to notify the setting value to the outside with a predetermined trigger, it is possible to increase the chances that the setting value can be specified in the external device.

  Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing the setting value, it is necessary to appropriately execute the control relating to the addition of the game medium. The invention relating to means G1 to means G10 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control relating to application of a game medium.

The gaming machine of means G1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) including a granting means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling a payout motor 21TM289) capable of granting a gaming value (pachinko ball),
Specific control means (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for big hit determination) capable of executing specific control means (step S21TM1690, etc.) A control microcomputer 100),
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM3540 to step S21TM3600) capable of controlling the setting change mode capable of changing the set value;
At least one of the gaming machine frame (gaming machine frame 3) and the door frame (glass door frame 3a) (for example, gaming machine frame 3) corresponding to the gaming machine can detect an open state that can be detected. Means (game provided with a gaming machine frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, a door frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is in an open state) A payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300),
Regardless of whether it is controlled to the setting change mode or not, when the open state is detected, the giving of the game value is limited (when the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the glass door frame When 3a is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289, so that the game medium is not paid out in the ball lending process and the prize ball process),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the provision of the game value, while being controlled to the setting change mode.

The gaming machine of means G2 is
A gaming machine of the means G1,
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) is the open state detection means (a game machine capable of detecting that the game machine frame 3 is in the open state). The payout control microcomputer 21TM370) having a gaming machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided with a frame open sensor and a door frame open sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is open When the (game machine frame 3 is opened) is detected, the setting change mode can be controlled (if YES in step S21TM3520, the processes in step S21TM3530 and subsequent steps are executed),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting change mode from being controlled when the open state of the gaming machine frame or the door frame is not detected.

The gaming machine of means G3 is
A gaming machine of means G1 or means G2,
It has a specific information storage means (RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100) for storing specific information (value of the setting change flag) capable of specifying that the control is performed in the setting change mode,
The specific information storage means is capable of storing the specific information even after power supply to the gaming machine is stopped,
The setting change mode control means can bring the game to a stopped state when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means after power supply to the gaming machine is restarted (game). In the control microcomputer 100, when the setting change flag is set after the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is in the ON state. , If the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied, the condition does not shift to the normal game process, and loops until the power is turned off),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, after the power supply is restarted, the game can be stopped when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means.

The game machine of means G4 is
A gaming machine of means G3,
Corresponding to the end of the setting change mode, the specific information (value of the setting change flag) is erased (YES in step S21TM3530 based on the operation of turning off the lock switch 21TM051), and the setting change mode is set. Ends and the setting change flag is cleared in step S21TM3710),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to shift to the normal game processing after the setting change mode ends.

The gaming machine of means G5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means G1 to G4,
The game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer 100 for executing the game control timer interrupt process) is provided,
The giving means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) has the open state detecting means, and determines whether to give a game value based on the detection of the open state. (When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming medium is not paid out, When neither opening of the gaming machine frame 3 nor the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected, the payout of the game medium is executed),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the granting means for controlling the granting of the game value has the open state detecting means, it is easy to determine whether or not to grant the game value, and the processing load can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means G6 is
A gaming machine of means G5,
The giving means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) is
Based on the fact that the information (payout number) regarding the giving of the game value is received from the game control means (the game control microcomputer 100 which executes the game control timer interrupt process), the game value is added,
It has a storage means (RAM 21TM302 having a buffer for storing the unpaid amount formed in the backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) capable of storing the added information (unpaid number) regarding the gaming value to be given,
The storage means can store the additional information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.
After the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted, the granting means executes the granting of the game value according to the granting information stored in the storage means (the power is cut off during execution of payout of the game medium). When it occurs, the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the payout that has been interrupted after the power is turned on is restarted, and the number of unpaid game media is paid out).
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to store the additional information regarding the gaming value to be provided after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and the information is stored after the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted. Since it is possible to add a game value corresponding to the additional information, it is possible to avoid the disadvantage of the player.

The gaming machine of means G7 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means G1 to means G6,
Can be connected to a game device (card unit 21TM050),
The giving means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) gives a game value based on a signal (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from the gaming device,
When the open state is detected, the addition of the game value based on the signal output from the game device is limited (the gaming machine frame door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is used for the gaming machine). When the opening of the frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, the card unit 21TM050 does not send the BRDY signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the game medium is paid out. Not),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the granting of the game value while the gaming machine frame or the door frame is being opened is restricted, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem associated with the granting operation while the gaming machine frame or the door frame is being opened, It is possible to smoothly proceed with maintenance work or the like while the gaming machine frame or the door frame is open.

The gaming machine of means G8 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means G1 to means G7,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM3540 to step S21TM3580) capable of controlling a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming a setting value is provided,
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
With the control to the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized,
The game state of the gaming machine is not initialized due to the control in the setting confirmation mode (when the clear switch 21TM052 is in the ON state when controlled in the setting change mode, in step S21TM3040). If YES is determined, RAM clear is executed in step S21TM3050, or if YES is determined in step S21TM3140, RAM clear is executed in step S21TM3150. When the setting confirmation mode is executed Based on that the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state, it is determined to be NO in step S21TM3040, and the process does not proceed to step S21TM3050, or it is determined to be NO in step S21TM3140. Do not want to migrate to step S21TM3150),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, a store clerk or the like in the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and also whether or not to initialize the game state.

The gaming machine of means G9 is
A gaming machine of means G8,
The storage means (RAM 21TM302 having a buffer for storing the unpaid amount formed in the backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) capable of storing the imparted information (data of the unpaid amount) to be imparted,
The added information is initialized as the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (when the RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 for initializing the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed). Along with this, the RAM clear of step S21TM1880 for initializing the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is also executed, so that the unpaid amount storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has not yet been paid out. The number of data is initialized),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized including the imparted information regarding the gaming value to be imparted, so that the management at the gaming shop can be facilitated.

The gaming machine of means G10 is
A gaming machine of means G8,
The storage means (RAM 21TM302 having a buffer for storing the unpaid amount formed in the backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) capable of storing the imparted information (data of the unpaid amount) to be imparted,
The added information is not initialized regardless of whether or not the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (the RAM clear of step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 for initializing the RAM 102 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is executed. Also, since the RAM clear in step S21TM1880 for initializing the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed, the unpaid number of unpaid number storage buffers formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Data is not initialized),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, even when the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized, the imparted information is not initialized, so that the information regarding the gaming value to be imparted can be appropriately protected.

  Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-500506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. With regard to the gaming machine as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), the occurrence status of the predetermined event in the gaming machine and the execution status of the process related to the change of the set value are displayed on the external device side. It may be necessary to distinguish them, but even if the signal output technology of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-500506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, both are recognized on the external device side. There is a problem that it is difficult to distinguish and recognize. The inventions relating to the means H1 to H5 are made in view of the above-mentioned actual circumstances, and an external device side divides the occurrence status of a predetermined event in the gaming machine and the execution status of the processing related to the change of the setting value. It is to provide a game machine that can be recognized separately.

The gaming machine of means H1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing specific control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 having different ranges of big hit determination random numbers),
The setting value can be changed,
A specific signal (security signal) can be output in response to a predetermined event (RAM clear, game machine frame / door frame open detection, etc.) that has occurred in the gaming machine, and processing related to changing the set value (setting change) It is possible to output a specific signal according to the
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the predetermined event is different from the output period of the specific signal corresponding to the process related to the change of the set value (the security signal is not controlled in the setting change mode by executing the RAM clear). Output for 30 seconds, and if RAM clear is executed and the setting change mode is controlled, it is output for 30 seconds added to the period changed to the setting change mode),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to externally notify the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value in a distinguishable manner.

The gaming machine of means H2 is
A gaming machine of the means H1,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM3540 to step S21TM3600) capable of controlling the setting change mode capable of changing the set value;
Setting confirmation mode control means capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the setting value (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM3540 to step S21TM3580);
The output period of the specific signal is different between when the setting change mode is controlled and when the setting check mode is controlled (the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode when the setting change mode is controlled). Is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the set period, and when controlled in the setting confirmation mode, output for a period obtained by adding 50 ms to the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between being controlled in the setting change mode and being controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means H3 is
A gaming machine of the means H1 or the means H2,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM3540 to step S21TM3600) capable of controlling the setting change mode capable of changing the set value;
Setting confirmation mode control means capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the setting value (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM3540 to step S21TM3580);
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
When neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and at least one of the transition operation and the initialization operation is performed, predetermined notification is performed (the CPU 120 for effect control, When a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated and a setting changeover switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated are received from the game control microcomputer 100, the “lock switch Is detected. "," The operation of the setting switch is detected. "Is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, a store clerk or the like in the game arcade can recognize that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

The gaming machine of means H4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means H1 to means H3,
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change correspondence signal) corresponding to the processing (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the change of set value,
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from different terminals (for example, the security signal is output from the tenth terminal and the setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal). ),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between the occurrence of the predetermined event and the process related to the change of the set value, and the process related to the change of the set value is executed. Can be notified to the outside in a clearer manner.

The gaming machine of means H5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means H1 to means H4,
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change correspondence signal) corresponding to the processing (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the change of set value,
It is possible to output the special signal in a special mode capable of specifying the set value (output a number of pulses corresponding to the set value),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it becomes possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

  As disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-500506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device side to grasp the execution status of the processing related to the set value. Even if the signal output technique of the conventional game machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, it is difficult for the external device side to grasp this. The inventions according to the means I1 to I6 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and provide a gaming machine capable of grasping the execution status of the processing related to the set value on the external device side. .

The game machine of means I1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing specific control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 having different ranges of big hit determination random numbers),
The setting value can be changed,
In response to the start of the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value, output of the specific signal (security signal) is started,
Stops the output of the specific signal (security signal) in response to the end of the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value,
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the control related to the set value is longer than a predetermined period (when controlled in the setting change mode, the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, and when controlled in the setting confirmation mode). , The output period of the security signal is 50 ms or more),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, the control state related to the set value can be appropriately notified to the outside of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine of the means I2,
A gaming machine of means I1,
It is possible to output a specific signal (security signal) in response to a predetermined event (RAM clear, gaming machine frame / door frame open detection, etc.) that has occurred in the gaming machine,
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the predetermined event is different from the output period of the specific signal corresponding to the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value (the security signal indicates that RAM clear is performed. If it is not controlled in the setting change mode, it is output for 30 seconds, and if RAM clear is executed and it is controlled in the setting change mode, it is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the period controlled in the setting change mode. ),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to externally notify the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value in a distinguishable manner.

The game machine of means I3 is
A gaming machine of means I1 or means I2,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM3540 to step S21TM3600) capable of controlling the setting change mode capable of changing the set value;
Setting confirmation mode control means capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the setting value (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM3540 to step S21TM3580);
The output period of the specific signal is different between when the setting change mode is controlled and when the setting check mode is controlled (the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode when the setting change mode is controlled). Is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the set period, and when controlled in the setting confirmation mode, output for a period obtained by adding 50 ms to the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between being controlled in the setting change mode and being controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means I4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means I1 to means I3,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM3540 to step S21TM3600) capable of controlling the setting change mode capable of changing the set value;
Setting confirmation mode control means capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the setting value (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM3540 to step S21TM3580);
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
When neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and at least one of the transition operation and the initialization operation is performed, predetermined notification is performed (the CPU 120 for effect control, When a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated and a setting changeover switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated are received from the game control microcomputer 100, the “lock switch Is detected. "," The operation of the setting switch is detected. "Is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, a store clerk or the like in the game arcade can recognize that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

The game machine of means I5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means I1 to means I4,
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change correspondence signal) corresponding to the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value,
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from different terminals (for example, the security signal is output from the tenth terminal and the setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal). ),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between the occurrence of the predetermined event and the process related to the change of the set value, and the process related to the change of the set value is executed. Can be notified to the outside in a clearer manner.

The gaming machine of means I6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means I1 to means I5,
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change correspondence signal) corresponding to the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value,
It is possible to output the special signal in a special mode capable of specifying the set value (output a number of pulses corresponding to the set value),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it becomes possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a figure for demonstrating a variation pattern and the kind of reach. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flow chart which shows an example of notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the determination rate in a notice production determination process. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | generation effect | action of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | generation effect | action of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | generation effect | action of a modification. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a payout control board. It is a rear view showing a pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. (A) is the front view which simplified the main board, (B) is explanatory drawing explaining the display content of a display monitor. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of some storage areas in RAM of a main board. It is the figure which showed the memory map of CPU in the main board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a RAM area corresponding to a storage area of a main board RAM. (A) is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the display monitor, and (B-1) to (B-6) are explanatory diagrams for explaining changes in the display contents of the display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the movement of the data stored in the storage area of a ring buffer. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in a setting change mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in setting confirmation mode. (1) is a diagram showing information displayed on the image display device when controlled in the setting change mode, and (2) shows information displayed on the image display device when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. It is a figure. (1)-(3) is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of setting suggestion production, (4) is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the production mode of setting suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control signal output to a payout control board from a game control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control command transmitted / received between a game control board and a payout control board. It is a block diagram showing a signal line etc. used for transmitting and receiving a control signal and a control command. It is a sequence diagram showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing which a payout control CPU performs. It is a flow chart which shows a timer interruption processing which a payout control CPU performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the ball lending limiting method in this embodiment. It is a timing diagram for explaining communication between the card unit and the pachinko gaming machine. It is a timing diagram which shows the 1st ball lending limitation method. It is a timing diagram which shows the 2nd ball lending restriction method. It is a timing diagram which shows the 3rd ball lending restriction method. It is a timing diagram which shows the 4th ball loan limitation method. It is a timing diagram which shows the example which does not restrict a ball loan during a setting change mode. It is a timing diagram showing an example in which payout is restarted after the setting change mode ends. It is a timing diagram showing an example of forcibly ending the payout due to the shift to the setting change mode. It is a timing diagram showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation. It is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode. It is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during a period when the gaming machine frame or the glass door frame is opened. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing a control when a power failure occurs before the setting value is determined, and (2) is a control when a power failure occurs after the setting value is determined. It is a figure showing a warning screen when a setting change operation is performed during a game. It is explanatory drawing of the signal output from each output terminal. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal and a setting change corresponding signal. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a setting value and the output aspect of a setting change corresponding signal. It is a timing diagram which shows the output aspect and output period of a setting change corresponding signal. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing. (1) A diagram showing a value displayed on the display monitor when the set value is not a regular value, and (2) A diagram showing a value displayed on the display monitor when the set value is a regular value. . It is a timing diagram which shows the method of restricting the ball lending based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of restarting a ball lending after the open state detection of the gaming machine frame is completed. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of restarting a ball lending without shifting to a setting change mode after a power failure. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of shifting to a setting change mode after power-off and forcibly ending the ball lending. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of shifting to a setting change mode and restarting a ball lending after power-off. It is a timing diagram showing a method of limiting the prize ball payout based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame. It is a timing diagram showing a method of restarting the prize ball payout after the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame is completed. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of restarting a prize ball payout, without shifting to a setting change mode after a power failure. FIG. 11 is a timing diagram showing a method of shifting to a setting change mode and forcibly ending prize ball payout after power-off. It is a timing chart which shows the method of shifting to a setting change mode and restarting a prize ball payout after power-off. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal and a setting change corresponding signal. FIG. 7 is a timing chart showing the output periods of a security signal and a setting change corresponding signal.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. There is provided a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged / reduced. In addition, the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable.

  The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols". In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is called a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game". The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers etc.) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

  A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of held storages. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also called a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also called a second reserved memory number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

  In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B that are configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A is the number of LEDs that are turned on. The first pending storage number is displayed by, and the second pending display unit 25B displays the second pending storage number according to the number of lit LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole which is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

  The variable winning a prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole which changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wing piece is moved. Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (the second starting winning opening is also closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When the game balls enter the second starting winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the device including the electric tulip type accessory as long as it can be changed between the closed state and the open state.

  At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the left and right lower sides of the game area), there are provided general winning openings 10 which are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when one of the general winning openings 10 is entered, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning opening is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening door is a special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for special electric auditors) is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening, and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning hole. On the other hand, in the special variable winning a prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the ON state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. Become.

  When a game ball enters the special winning opening, a predetermined number (eg, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When the game balls enter the big winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the general winning opening 10, for example.

  The entry of a game ball into each prize hole including the general prize hole 10 is also referred to as a "prize". In particular, winning at the starting openings (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a normal symbol display device 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal symbol game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the universal figure game is executed.

  Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure reserves, which is the number of universal figure games pending for execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effect is provided in the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball striking device. ) Is provided with a hit ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the action (operation etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player's rotating operation of the hit ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the previous execution period of the general education game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general education game based on the passage). , The universal figure game based on the passage is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol is "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, the opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

  When the game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  In addition, when the game ball enters into the starting winning opening (winning prize) during the period during execution of the special drawing game, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state described later (starting winning occurs, If the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be immediately executed), the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) Is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, the "big hit symbol" is reached and the big hit symbol is given. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, "2") is stopped and displayed, it is a "small hit". In addition, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing symbol".

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

  In the big hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is one of the elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier of the two. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. In this way, one cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

  In the big hit game state, the player can get the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the big hit game state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

  In addition, the "big hit" is set to the big hit type. For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum open period) of the special winning opening, and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., described later) are prepared, and big hits are made accordingly. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain a large number of prize balls, or a big hit type that has few prize balls or almost no prize balls may be provided.

  In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as in the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same. Etc.) the special winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

  After the jackpot gaming state is over, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability changing state according to the jackpot type.

  In the time saving state, control (time saving control) for shortening the average special figure changing time (period during which the special figure is changed) is executed as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average figure change time (the period during which the figure is changed) is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of being "Public hit" in the figure game is improved compared to the normal state. The control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved, which is an advantageous state for the player.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and a "big hit" is likely to occur.

  The time saving state and the probability changing state are continued until one of the end conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started. The end condition that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cutting (shortening of the times of cutting, probability change of times of cutting etc.).

  The normal state is a game state other than special states such as a big hit game state, which is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a probability variation state, etc., and the display result in the figure game is "universal figure win". Probability and probability that the display result in the special figure game is "big hit", etc., the pachinko gaming machine 1 returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the initial setting state (for example, when the system is reset). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

  A state in which the probability variation control is executed is also referred to as a high accuracy state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not executed is also referred to as a low accuracy state. A state in which the time saving control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which the time saving control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the time saving state is a low accurate high base state, the definite change state is a high accurate high base state, and the normal state is a low accurate low base state. The highly accurate and low base state is also referred to as the highly accurate low base state.

  After the small hit game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). Note that the display result of the special figure game does not have to be "small hit".

  The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game or exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 is performed. May be performed by turning on / off the light, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

  As effects to be executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game is displayed. In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing at which the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (derived).

  In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative design stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination described later, the decorative design which is not yet stopped and displayed is variably displayed. Is an aspect that continues.

  In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the proportion of the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) that is a “big hit” (also called a big hit reliability or a big hit expectation degree) according to the effect mode. Different types of reach effects are executed. Reach productions include, for example, normal reach and super-reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the pattern is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. ..

  In the case of "probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is finished, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7", etc.) are also stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot gaming state is transformed to the probability variation state. In the case of "uncertain variation big hit (normal big hit)" that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation design, and the even decoration pattern is also referred to as a non-probability variation design (normal design). After the reach mode is achieved with the non-probability variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation jackpot” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5, the fixed decorative design (for example, "" 1 3 5 ”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative patterns forming the chances are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It should be noted that the display result of the special drawing game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state of a mode similar to small hit game state) and when it is "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design does not become the reach mode, but as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach-miss".) May be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach-miss"). Further, when the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination ("reach miss") (Also referred to as) fixed decoration pattern may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern becomes “reach lost”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice production includes a notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, once the decorative design is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative design, and then the variable display is resumed, one variable display can be simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

  Even during the big hit game state, a big hit mid-game production for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit performance, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect showing that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, in some big hitting type (the big hitting type of the big hitting game state of the form similar to the small hitting game state, for example, the big hitting type which makes the following game state the high-precision state) big hitting game By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-precision state. May be.

  Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and progresses in the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of general figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling a gaming state, a small hitting gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 is, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal figure hold indicator 25C, and the like, and an output port for transmitting the signal.

  The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (the game ball passes or the game ball passes from the various switches for detecting the game ball (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch 23)). A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the vehicle has entered is transmitted and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. To transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), a variation pattern used when the special figure game is executed (details will be described later). )), The status of the game (for example, the start and end of variable display, the status of opening of the special winning opening, the occurrence of winnings, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery.

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121, thereby performing a process together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12, and an effect to be executed). (Including the determination of). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the effect execution based on a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and is a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal according to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designating signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output the sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Alternatively, a lamp signal (a signal that specifies the lighting / extinguishing state of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. In addition, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

  The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

  It should be noted that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of turning on / off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32). You may do it.

  The random number circuit 124 updatable counts the numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of.

  Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.) register settings, settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control command is received, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, for example, in the image display device 5.

  When the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop time process immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes a process of adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed by using the error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). In accordance with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power interruption, and a production control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. For these commands, the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of restoration from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the recovery from the power interruption has been performed or is being restored from the power interruption. The screen is displayed to The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

  After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can regularly execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to execute the predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port are performed via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not the detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 and start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) is output (step S23).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, whereby the execution and suspension of the special symbol game, the control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized. See below).

  Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41), the management of execution and suspension of the general figure game, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "universal figure hit". The execution of the general figure game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the general figure reservation display unit 25C is turned on to display the number of general figure reservations.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when an electric power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the holding information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of holding memories is executed. When the start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as holding information. Further, the process of pre-reading the display result or the variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of holding memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of holding memories, and the look-ahead determination is performed on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of the start winning set to be transmitted in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process processing is completed. Is transmitted to.

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game, based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" or "small hit" and "big hit" when the big hit type Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set corresponding to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special drawing game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order winning).

  When making various determinations based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process uses a random number value for fluctuation pattern determination to select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the processing to determine. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

  The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether reach or not), the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, the setting process for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol It includes the process of measuring. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

  The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, the stop display (deriving) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes the process to set up for. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "miss", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", when the game is controlled to the time saving state or the probability changing state, and when the cut-out is completed, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

  The big hit opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This big hit opening preprocessing includes processing for starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening in the open state based on that the display result is "big hit" Has been. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the special winning opening and an upper limit number of executions of the round are set according to which the big hit type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening preprocessing is completed.

  The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The processing during the big hit opening ends.

  The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big jackpot post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the big winning opening has reached the set upper limit number of executions, when the maximum number of executions has been reached, the big hit game state It includes the process of setting to terminate the. Then, when the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution number, the special figure process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

  The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". In this big hit end processing, waiting processing until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, or a certain change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

  The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening to the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result of "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing is ended.

  The small hitting open process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included is included. When the timing of ending the small hitting game state is reached by returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during opening of the small hitting ends.

  The small hit ending process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hitting end processing is ended.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register settings of the installed CTC (counter / timer circuit) are performed. Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control processing, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on the CTC register setting, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated each time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I / O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 is stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

  After the command analysis process is executed in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and the movable body 32. The control for operating various effect devices, such as the drive operation of, is performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

  Following the effect control process processing of step S76, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing in step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice production are performed based on the production control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, the processing for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold memories specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols in the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command or the like specifying start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting processing, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, the reach effect and various The presence / absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. Then, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the effect display during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L, 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and sending a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating that the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed from the main board 11 is received. Corresponding to what has been done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect display processing during variable display ends.

  The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. When a production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6." Update to ". On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed without receiving the command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “miss”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

  The effect process during the small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. .. Further, in the small hitting production effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to end the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hitting finish effect. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is finished.

  The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In the small hitting end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

  The big hit midfield effect process of step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit mid production processing, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, a production control pattern or the like corresponding to the production contents in the big hit gaming state, and executes various production controls in the big hit gaming state based on the set contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big hit game state from the main board 11. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit midfield effect process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but encloses the game medium and gives a score based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

  In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination is a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus).

  The program and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed by using the hardware resources of the other device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, one of the ratios is “0%” and the other is “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, the characteristic part 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-1 is a diagram for explaining variation patterns and types of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8A, in the present embodiment, the variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1 of non-reach loss without the variable display mode of the decorative design being the reach mode and the display result being “miss”. -2, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the display result is "miss". The reach change pattern PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc. The fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like are prepared.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that suggests that the jackpot state is controlled. As shown by the number of black stars in FIG. 8-1 (B), the reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super reach. Reach B <super reach A. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it is a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the super reach is executed via the normal reach. Further, during the reach effect of the super reach, there is a case where a development effect of developing (promoting) to a reach with higher reliability is executed. The variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like illustrated in FIG. 8-1A are variation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. Although FIG. 8-1 (A) shows a variation pattern in which the reliability develops to one level higher super reach, a variation pattern in which the reliability develops in two or more stages is also provided. Also, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed multiple times may be provided.

  In this embodiment, except for the normal reach, which has the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), the title notification mode differs depending on the reach type. Specifically, the super-reach E, which has the lowest reliability among the super-reach, is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and the other super-reach is notified of the title by display and voice. In this way, the notification of the title is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than in the reach with low reliability. As a result, the player's expectation can be effectively agitated, and the effect of production is improved. It should be noted that the notification mode of the title may be changed depending on the reliability or irrespective of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Also, the font of the title character (Gothic font, Mincho font, etc.) and typeface (line book, open book, etc.) may be different depending on the type of reach.

  The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the title itself such as the name of the reach, and may be the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the effect content of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of production operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following production operation is executed by the production control CPU 120 executing the production control process process based on the production control command transmitted from the main board 11. 8-2 and 8-3 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of super reach in the present embodiment. FIG. 8-2 (A) shows that the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. ing. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (B), the decorative pattern showing the number 7 on “left” and “right” is stopped, and the reach mode is set. After that, the effect branches according to the type of reach.

(Super reach A)
In the case of super reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (C), the character 31AK001, which is a ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses after the super reach effect is started, such as when the introduction part of the reach effect of the super reach (also referred to as super reach effect) is finished, as shown in FIG. The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the characters "SP Reach A") is displayed on the entire screen, and the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach (here "Super Reach A") is output from the speaker 8. As a result, the title of Super Reach A is announced. After that, the title 31AK002 of the super reach A is erased, the character 31AK003 that is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 are displayed as shown in FIG. 8-2 (E). The succeeding part of the reach effect of the super reach A that is confronted with is executed. The production in which the characters confront each other is also called a battle production, and when the teammate character wins in the battle production, it becomes a big hit, and when the teammate character is defeated, it becomes a loss.

  Note that when the dialogue is displayed on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the speaker 8 may output a voice corresponding to the dialogue. Further, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 8-2 (E), and may be displayed in subtitles on the lower portion of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super reach B)
In the case of the super reach B, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (C), the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time elapses from the start of the super reach effect, such as when the introduction part of the super reach effect is finished, as shown in FIG. (Here, the characters “SP reach B”) are displayed, and the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, “super reach B”) is output from the speaker 8 so that the title of super reach B is displayed. Be informed. After that, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is erased, the character 31AK006 that is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 are displayed as shown in FIG. 8-2 (G). The succeeding part of the reach effect of the super reach B which is confronted with is executed.

  In this way, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach title is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the super reach effect was started. By doing so, the title can be notified after the player has shown the introduction part of the super reach effect, etc., so that the effect effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

  In addition, super reach A (FIG. 8-2 (C) → (D) → (E) ...) and super reach B (FIG. 8-2 (C) → (F) → (G) ...) Then, in the introduction part until the title is notified, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 8-2 (C)). By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super-reach is performed after the super-reach effect is started and which title is notified. Super-reach A and super-reach B are not limited to completely commoning the presentation mode until the title is informed, and it is possible to determine which super-reach will be achieved by paying attention to the production. You may make it a common production mode. For example, in the introduction part of the super reach A and the super reach B, the super reach effect (for example, the effect of displaying the enemy character or suggesting the enemy character) is executed in a mode related to the subsequently notified title. You can By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player comes to pay attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be performed after it is possible to specify which super-reach will be performed.

(Super reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the characters “SP Reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, the speaker 8 outputs a voice corresponding to the reach title name (here, "defeat the enemy") to notify the title of the super reach D. As described above, in the super reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach effect. Further, below the title 31AK007, an expectation suggestion display 31AK008 that indicates the expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. Here, the expectation is the expectation of a big hit, but it does not have to be exactly the same as the reach's big hit reliability.

  It should be noted that the notification of the voice of the super reach D does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the contents of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is changed depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

  After the title is notified in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation suggestion display 31AK008 are continuously reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of the reach even during the reach production. Note that FIG. 8-2 (I) shows the effect contents common to FIG. 8-2 (C) (super reach A, super reach B), but the super reach effect dedicated to super reach D is executed. May be.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (J), the character 31AK009 that is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is displayed. Executed.

(Super reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (A), the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the character “SP Reach E”) is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. As a result, the title of Super Reach E is announced. Note that in Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 that is an enemy character are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 face each other is displayed. Executed. In this way, in Super Reach E, the title is notified along with the progress of the reach effect. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach production.

  In the reach effect of the super reach E with low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent the player from having an excessive expectation by notifying the title without stopping the reach effect. On the other hand, in the reach effects of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach effects is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)). , (H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that in super reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach. Contrary to this embodiment, in the reach effect of super reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach effect. In the super-reach reach effect with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach effect may be stopped to notify the title.

(Timing notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the super reach production is performed. The title is announced at the start. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, which have a high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the super reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach that have a low jackpot reliability. In E, the title was announced at the start of the super reach production, but in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title was announced at the start of super reach production, and in the case of a reach with low jackpot reliability, The title may be announced after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is displayed. The title is announced on a part (second area) of the screen. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be that the title is displayed in a size that fits in the entire screen, or the title is displayed on the entire background as a background for title notification. It may be a thing (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, or the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

  The method for changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be arbitrarily changed according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability. Further, in the case of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect, the display area may be different as in this embodiment, or the display place may be different.

(Expectation level indication)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in super-reach A and super-reach B, which have a high jackpot reliability, super-reach D, which has a lower jackpot reliability than super-reach A and super-reach B, is displayed without displaying the expectation indication. In the title notification in, the expectation level suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming dull. Further, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing his / her expectation by displaying the expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. In addition, you may make it display an expectation degree suggestion display in at least one part of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach E.

  As shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) and the like, the expectation degree suggestion display is not limited to that indicated by the number of black stars, and the expectation degree may be indicated by a meter or a gauge. You may make it display the numerical value corresponding to. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) and the like, in the case of indicating by the number of black stars, half the number (half) of black stars can be displayed, and the number of stages of expectation may be increased. ..

(Timing display end timing)
In addition, in this embodiment, in super reach A and super reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and the super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach effect can be focused. Further, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until the determination effect described later is executed. As a result, in super reach D and super reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during super reach production. Further, by performing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the title display end timing may be changed at any timing, because the effect of production can be improved.

  Here, although the effect operation of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted, for example, title notification or expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decision production)
After each of the reach effects has been executed, at the timing of deriving the display result (the final stage of the variable display), the decided effect for notifying whether or not the display result is the “big hit” is executed. The decision effect includes a decision effect indicating that the display result is “big hit” and a decision effect indicating that the display result is “miss”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (B), a decided effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. After that, if the display result is “big hit”, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (C), an image 31AK013 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-3 (D), A definite decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination is derived. If the display result is “miss”, an image showing that the teammate character has been defeated is displayed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a reach lose combination is derived.

  In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified even during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the decided effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to focus attention on the decided effect, and it is possible to execute the title notification with a sharpness.

  In the effect operation example shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative pattern is reduced in the lower right portion of the image display device 5 to perform variable display. The display of the decorative pattern during the reach production may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative design may not be displayed during the reach effect, and the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach effect.

  When displaying a hold display, an active display, a character that is permanently displayed during variable display, and a display related to cell-phone interlocking on the image display device 5, it is not displayed as appropriate during the reach effect of super reach in order to draw attention to the reach effect. May be At that time, these displays may be kept displayed during the reach production with low reliability such as the super reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from excessively expecting the reach effect with low reliability, and to focus on the reach effect in the reach effect with high reliability.

(Development production)
Next, an example of the effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when the development effect is executed while the reach effect of super reach D is being executed (the title notification of super reach D is being executed), FIG. As shown in (B), an effect in which the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn is executed. After that, when developing to the super reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (C), the title of the super reach A is notified and the reach effect of the super reach A is executed. In the case of development into super reach B, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (D), the title of super reach B is announced and the reach effect of super reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 8-4, when the reach of the development destination is the reach that performs the title notification by the display and the sound, the title notification by the display and the sound is executed again.

  Note that the development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), and may be an effect in which the screen gradually cracks and cracks, or a sandstorm (display indicating that a failure has occurred). It may be displayed. With such an effect, an unexpected effect can be executed. It should be noted that there may be a development effect of gasse, such as an effect in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion production)
In the example of the effect operation shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the expectation suggestion display 31AK008 displayed the black stars indicating the expectations from the beginning, but five white stars are displayed first, and It is also possible to execute an expectation suggesting effect that suggests the degree of expectation by becoming a black star.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), when announcing the title of Super Reach D, five white star expectation degree indications 31AK021 are first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation indication 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (C), the black star 31AK022 moves and is expected. An effect that fits into one of the white stars of the degree suggestion display 31AK021 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (D) and (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise every time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation has settled in the degree-of-expectation suggestion display 31AK021, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (F), the black star is highlighted such that it glows. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion production has ended.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) to (F), the black stars are displayed one by one, and the expectation degree indicated by the expectation suggestion display is increased by one step. One or more may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be increased by two or more levels. Alternatively, half the black stars may be displayed to raise the expectation by half. In this case, different voices may be output, or the same voice may be output, depending on the number of stars displayed (the number of stages of expected degree of increase). For example, the same sound may be output when half a black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing so, the expectation suggestive production is diversified, and the production effect is improved. In addition, the same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of steps of the degree of expectation increasing at one time, and it fits into the white star of the degree of expectation indication, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of steps of the degree of expectation increasing You may make it perform the effect like.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In the different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command that specifies a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background displayed on the image display device 5, the character, the motif, the sound output from the speaker 8, and the like may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of variable displays or the game state, or may be changed by the player's operation.

  FIGS. 8-5 (G) to (L) are example operation effects of title notification and expectation suggestion effect when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes and the special mode is set. In the normal mode, title notification and expectation suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) to (F). In the special mode, the reach effect based on the variation pattern of super reach D is the reach effect of super reach D2 having a different effect mode from the reach effect of super reach D. Therefore, when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-5 (G). At this time, although the voice corresponding to the reach title name is output from the speaker 8, a voice different from the normal mode (for example, voice having a different voice color) is output. Further, the expectation indication 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star shape but a rhombus shape.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (H), a black diamond 31AK025 larger than the star in the expectation indication 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (I), the black diamond 31AK025 moves and is expected. An effect that fits into one of the white diamonds of the degree suggestion display 31AK024 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs the sound "Pong" indicating that the black diamonds indicating the degree of expectation have increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the reach expectation. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation has been set in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombus is highlighted, such as shining, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (L). In this way, depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) that is determined according to the player's selection, the game status, etc., the title notification mode is made different, and the effect is diversified. improves.

  FIG. 8-5 shows an example of the performance operation when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, but other reach performances (title notification, expectation level) depending on the performance mode (state when the reach performance is executed). (Including suggestive effects) may be different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not the reach title is notified and the execution rate of the title notification may be changed. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, an effect according to the player's preference can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation suggestion display, and the expectation suggestion effect that gradually increases the number of black stars is executed. You may make it perform the expectation suggestion production which reduces the number of the display which suggests stepwise. Such an expectation suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the expectation suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other example of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect that gradually increases the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), after the title of Super Reach D is announced and the effect of gradually increasing the black star is completed, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (B), the image display is performed. The development effect in which the button image 31AK031 is displayed on the device 5 is executed. Here, when the operation on the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (C), the title 31AK032 of the super reach C (here, the characters "SP reach C") is displayed. , The title of Super Reach C is notified. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. Further, below the title 31AK032, an expectation suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is 3 is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. It should be noted that, after the movable body 32 has operated, the development effect in which the title and the expectation suggestion display change may be executed.

(Preliminary performance)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the title notification mode (for example, the title display color). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the title 31AK036 of the super reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach A is displayed. After the notification, the title notice that the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B). As described above, the title is displayed in black when the title announcement is not executed, and the title is displayed in a color other than black when the title announcement is executed. In the title notice shown in FIG. 8-7, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is announced by voice. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The timing of displaying the title in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display.

  In addition, when the title announcement in which the display mode (display color) of the title changes is executed, the sound according to the changed display mode may be output after the display mode of the title has changed. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. Further, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the changed title.

(Timing notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title in the reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of an effect (specific effect) such as a notice effect or a development effect in which the degree of expectation of being controlled to a big hit advantageous state is improved. By doing so, when the title is once notified, the effect of improving the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 8-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the notice effect and the manner of effect. The notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 within the variable display start setting process of step S171 of FIG. In the notice production determination process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified by the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a super reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001).

  If it is the variation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of the super reach (whether or not the title notice is executed) is determined (step 31AKS002).

  In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9A, for example, depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "miss". As shown in Figure 8-9 (A), the display color of the Super Reach title changes from “black”, “red”, “black” to “red”, and “black” to “fruit pattern”. There are things that change, from "red" to "fruit pattern", and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability varies according to the timing of change in the title display color. By doing so, the player comes to pay attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of production is improved.

  The "fruit pattern" may be such that the title characters are displayed in bold and the characters themselves are "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the title display area may be "fruit pattern". .. There may be a pattern displayed as "fruit pattern" from the beginning. As for the display color changing, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the display color may change after the title notification is executed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may vary depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach (for example, super reach D or super reach E) in which the title display period is long, a plurality of changing timings may be provided and the changing timing may be determined as either one. Then, in the case of a super-reach with a short title display period (for example, super-reach A or super-reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or less than that of a super-reach with a long title display period.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as effect modes, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A) in the normal mode, and as shown in FIG. 8-9 (B) in the special mode. The title display color is determined at a rate different from that of the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by changing the execution mode (display color or change timing of the display color) of the title announcement depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a dialogue notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed by the display mode of the character's dialogue in the reach production of super reach (for example, the display color of the dialogue).

  After the display color of the title of the super reach is determined, the display color of the character dialogue (whether or not to execute the dialogue notice) in the reach production of the super reach is determined (step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined at the determination rate shown in FIG. 8-9C, for example, depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "miss". As shown in FIG. 8-9 (C), the display color of the lines in the reach effect is changed from “white”, “red”, and “white” to “red”. ), The jackpot reliability is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the dialogue. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the production is improved. For the display color changing, the display color may be changed after the dialogue is displayed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the effect modes of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the title notice and the dialogue notice include the same effect mode (display color), the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same effect mode is achieved. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the timing of changing the presentation mode of the title announcement and the dialogue announcement. For example, when the change timing is the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timing is different, or the jackpot reliability may be changed depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

  When the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes, the display color of the dialogue may be determined in the special mode at a rate different from that of the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

  Note that, instead of the announcement of the dialogue, the announcement production of announcing the jackpot reliability may be executed by changing the production mode of the reach production. In that case, in the notice production, a plurality of change timings of the production mode may be provided so that the jackpot reliability varies according to the change timing.

  After the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, or when it is determined that the variation pattern is not the super reach (step AK31S001; No), the presence / absence of execution and the effect mode are determined for other notice effects (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the notice effect determination process is ended.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the title notice and the line notice can be executed in the case of super-reach, but the title notice in the case of a specific super-reach (for example, other than super-reach with low reliability) is possible. Alternatively, at least one of the speech notice and the notice may be made executable. Further, the title notice and the dialogue notice have been described as being determined by the determination rate shown in FIG. 8-9, but the determination rate is arbitrary, and the determination rate may be different depending on the type of super reach, for example. Good. By doing so, the notice effect corresponding to the type of reach can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the number of executable presentation modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) is different between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing so, the effects are varied and the effect of the effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of executable production modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and type of executable production modes may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute a notice presentation with a sense of unity, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action production)
When the effect form of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect form changes may be executed. For example, the action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the action effect in which the image acts on at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or the dialogue may be changed. The effect mode (effect effect image or the like) of the effect effect may be the same regardless of whether it acts on the title or the dialogue. In addition, there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the dialogue does not change even though the effect effect is executed. When the action effect is executed, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination result related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be executed by the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the dialog notice changes according to the effect mode of the action effect (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may differ, or the title effect may change. The ratio of which presentation mode is changed and the ratio of which effect is changed may be different from that of the speech notice, or the ratio of how many colors (how many stages) it is changed may be different. . By executing such action effect, the player pays attention to which one of the title and the dialogue is acted when the action effect image is displayed, and the effect is improved. In addition, when there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence / absence of execution of the effect effect and the effect mode may be determined at different rates depending on the effect modes. By doing so, the effect effect corresponding to the effect mode can be executed, and the effect effect is improved.

  As another example of such action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of one of a title and a dialogue is displayed according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action content of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May be changed. By doing so, the player comes to pay attention to the effect contents of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above characteristic portion 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all the characteristic portions described in the above embodiments are not essential configurations, and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub liquid crystal)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Although referred to as a sub liquid crystal here, the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed to the vicinity of the image display device 5 or the like, or may be a movable type or a retractable type. On the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a display of a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal. When the title is continuously displayed after the notification of the title, like the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, the title or the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, the title or the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal after the title is notified on the image display device 5. By doing so, the title and the expectation suggestion display can be displayed without hindering the super reach effect on the image display device 5, and the title and the expectation suggestion display can be easily understood.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestive effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the notification of the title related to other effects (informing mainly displaying characters). May be. For example, in the case of executing a look-ahead zone effect in which the background image and the effect mode on the image display device 5 are changed to a plurality of zones (stages, effect modes, etc.) as a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect), the transition zone is executed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification. In the case of presenting a mission (“reach with 7”, “use the stick controller to annihilate the enemy”, etc.) and perform a mission effect that gives the player an advantageous state when the mission is achieved, The present invention may be applied to mission title notification.

(Modification 1 of the characteristic part 31AK)
In the above-described embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a decided effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a “big hit” is executed, and then the display result is displayed ( FIG. 8-3 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a decided effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving a display result, an operation effect that prompts the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and a predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the win / loss of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, the display result is shown according to the operation of the player, so that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased and the interest is improved.

  FIG. 8-10 and FIG. 8-11 are diagrams showing an example of an operation operation of super reach in a modified example in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), after the reach mode is set in the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), a character 31AK041 which is a teammate character and a character which is an enemy character. 31AK042 is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 8-10 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 8-11 (G) to (I), the reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

  With the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (C), a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. As a result, the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that the operation effect is executed are prepared. The jackpot reliability varies depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. Further, the image showing that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a mode with higher reliability.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (D), the praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-10 (E), the praying character 31AK045 is changed to the pleased character 31AK046 and the small button image 31AK043 is displayed. It changes to the large button image 31AK047.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-11 (I), an effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is shot from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and a large button image 31AK047 is displayed. The effect 31AK050 that the bullet hits is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

  As described above, in this modified example, when the operation effect image changes, the action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. The operation effect image may change without the effect effect. In addition, the operation effect image may not change even though the effect effect has been executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

  Then, before a predetermined time when the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 8-11 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is displayed in the central portion as shown in FIG. 8-11 (K). Is enlarged and displayed to prompt an operation of pulling the stick controller 31A. Further, at this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A is in an effective operation valid period.

  Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (L), an image 31AK052 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed. After that, at the timing when the variation time ends, as shown in FIG. If no operation is detected within the predetermined operation valid period, the image shown in Fig. 8-11 (L) is automatically displayed.

  In this modified example, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as the operation effect images, and when the operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability is high. Even if a low-reliability operation effect image is displayed, it may change to a highly-reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so the effect effect is improved and the player's expectation is improved. Can be maintained.

  In addition, in the example of the production operation shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11, although the notification of the title of the reach and the indication of the degree of expectation are omitted, the reach production shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11 is omitted. Alternatively, it may be appropriately executed in parallel with the operation production. The determination regarding the operation effect and the operation effect image (whether the operation effect is present, the operation effect image to be displayed, the presence of the effect effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8.

(Modification 2 of the characteristic part 31AK)
You may make it perform the suggestion display which shows the expectation degree of control to an advantageous state, such as a big hit game state. For example, the shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, the effect of covering the screen with the shutter display is executed after the variable display is started. Further, in the reach title effect, an effect of displaying the reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect is executed after the reach. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, the specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title announcement in the above-described embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

  The specific image is an image with high jackpot reliability that is displayed by including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of the element E1, a melon image of the element E2, an apple image of the element E3, a watermelon image of the element E4, and a strawberry image of the element E5. The fruit pattern image configured to include these elements E1 to E5 is the specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 forming the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display, respectively.

  When the shutter effect is executed after the start of variable display, the jackpot reliability is higher when the fruit pattern image is displayed than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the reach production, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. An image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image showing the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach letter in red letters). Then, depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, any one of the image patterns may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery.

  When performing the shutter display and the reach title display, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and the game effect lamp 9 emits light. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. Further, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output periods of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 8-12 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (a), when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display on the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started as shown in FIG. 8-12 (b). The downward arrows indicate the variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the reach state is set, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (c).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (d), the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed, for example, in a small size on the upper right of the screen, and a character is displayed on the left side of the screen. A reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the content of the super reach to be executed is shown as a reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "battle reach" indicating that the reach effect accompanied by the battle effect is executed are displayed.

  Further, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Furthermore, after the common sound is output, an effect is produced in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) such as "hot and hot", which indicates that the jackpot reliability is high. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title effect, by outputting the specific sound, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Note that the common sound and the specific sound have been described in the case where the output periods are completely separated, but the output periods may be partially overlapped.

  Then, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 8-12 (e) is executed. The enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and the ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the teammate character wins the battle with the enemy character, the word "Battle Victory!" Is displayed on the upper left of the screen. It is announced that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle production is completed, the variable display screen is returned to the original numerical design. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (f), all the symbols are stopped, and the big hit symbol “777” is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and 8-12 (d), both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 that form the fruit pattern image. By doing so, the fruit pattern image can be preferably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 which have different display sizes. As a result, it is possible to accurately notify that the fruit pattern image with high jackpot reliability is displayed.

  The display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d). Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

  Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d) are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is the specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

  The determination regarding the shutter effect (presence or absence of the shutter effect and effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8. In that case, the shutter effect may be determined based on the result of determining the title display color in step 31AKS002 of FIG. 8-8. For example, when the title display color is determined to be a fruit pattern, the fruit pattern shutter effect may be easily executed. Further, the decision regarding the reach title effect may be executed together with the decision regarding the shutter effect in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8.

[Explanation on Characteristic Part 21TM]
Next, the characteristic part 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. 9-1. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 2 described above, on the main board 11, the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, etc. Various parts are connected, and various effect devices such as the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are connected to the effect control board 12, but these are omitted in FIG. 9-1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side. As shown in FIG. 9-3, the main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 21TM201, and the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is advanced. Various circuits for controlling are installed. The main board 11 is mainly intended for a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and a sub-side control board including an effect control board 12 and the like. It has a function of outputting a control command as an example of the command information as a control signal and transmitting it, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like. Moreover, the main board 11 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) which comprises the 1st special symbol display device 4A and the 2nd special symbol display device 4B, and the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by turning on / off / coloring the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3 and FIG. 9-5 (A), the main substrate 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 which is visible from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 21TM029 is provided. , It also has a function to display various winning information about winning. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be changed over by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

  The main board 11 incorporates various signals such as a power-off signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal in addition to the detection signals from the game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for detecting the game ball, for example. An information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as a security signal from the switch circuit 110 transmitting to 100 and the terminal board 21TM016 is mounted.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-5 (A), the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 9-1 is enclosed in a substrate case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, A display monitor 21TM029 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged in the center of 11, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged on the front side when the main board 11 is viewed. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 9-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode described later is provided in the lower center of the back surface of the main board 11. The main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened. Therefore, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 in the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. It is the front when visually recognized, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  In addition, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), each winning opening (big winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning opening, hereinafter, "entry area" (Also referred to as) the number of game balls entering the game, and various prize information such as the consecutive ratio and the winning combination is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and the prize information is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to confirm various winning information such as consecutive ratios and winning ratios after installation at the game hall. That is, on the maker side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming balls enter the general winning opening (pass the test) at a predetermined frequency. Further, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment has been made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the game ball has entered the general winning opening at the frequency as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made after the installation in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Further, the power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and set values such as a winning probability (ball-out rate) of a big hit, which will be described later, are changed on the lower right side of the back surface of the power supply board. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 that functions as a setting switch for power supply and a power switch 21TM055 are provided. A clerk at the game hall operates the power switch 21TM055 while the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the main board 11, the performance control board 12, the payout control board 21TM037, and the like are predetermined. Operating voltage is supplied. Furthermore, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and initialization processing (RAM clear) described later is performed. Executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 on the same power supply substrate, the power-on operation and the initialization operation can be easily performed.

  The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Therefore, only a store clerk who possesses a predetermined key can operate it. Further, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires key operation, only the clerk of the game shop who has a key for operating the lock switch 21TM051 can operate it. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation by a predetermined key, but is capable of executing the switching operation and executing an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation). It may be a possible switch.

  The lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state even if the force is not applied by the clerk of the game hall or the like. The lock switch 21TM051 has a structure in which the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the clerk at the amusement arcade must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key, so the clerk at the amusement arcade leaves the lock switch 21TM051 in the ON state. You can prevent it from happening.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-3, in the lower portion of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for discharging the gaming ball winning each winning opening and the gaming ball entering the out opening to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (exhaust port) is provided, and an outlet switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a launched game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110 described above, as shown in FIG.

  The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED.

  FIG. 9-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21TM037 is provided with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and has at least a built-in RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a RAM (not shown), a ROM (not shown) storing a payout control program, an I / O port, and the like constitute a payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by a payout control CPU 21TM371, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a RAM and a ROM, and an I / O port. Further, the I / O port may be incorporated in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  The detection signals from the out-of-ball switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number counting switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and then output to the main board 11 via the I / O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. ..

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21TM037 can open and close the gaming machine frame opening sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2 and the front surface of the gaming board 2. A game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 including a door frame opening sensor that detects the opening of the glass door frame 3a that is covered with is connected, and various abnormalities are generated based on detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, whereby the payout control microcomputer The 21TM370 is capable of distinguishing between the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

  The detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor including a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used for detecting that the game ball is clogged, that is, so-called ball biting. .. In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037, the detection signal from the ball burnout switch 21TM187 indicates the ball burnout state, or the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank state. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

  Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a low level with respect to the launch board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball launch from the hitting ball launching device. Output full signal. The firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 output from the AND circuit 21TM091 of the firing board 21TM090 is transmitted from the firing board 21TM090 to the firing motor 21TM094. The full signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the launch board 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the launch motor 21TM094) Which is a signal that plays a role of supplying power from the power supply substrate) is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting a full signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 is stopped.

   The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) signals to / from the game control microcomputer 100 by serial communication. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are connected between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via serial communication circuits 21TM505 and 21TM380. For confirmation, signals (prize ball request signal, reception ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted / received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal for confirming the connection (a prize ball request signal in this embodiment) at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the award ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100 is received, transmits a signal (reception ACK signal) to that effect to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, by placing specific data on the prize ball request signal or the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 at the timing of transmitting / receiving the prize ball request signal or the reception ACK signal. It is configured to exchange specific data with. For example, when a winning occurs, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of award balls to be paid out by changing a predetermined bit of the award ball request signal, and the award that has been set. A ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the prize ball payout operation is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the data indicating the end of the prize ball by changing the predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the received ACK signal having the setting is set. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100. In addition, when a predetermined error (error such as ball lending, full tank, out of ball, etc.) occurs, data indicating the content of the error is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is made. The received ACK signal thus made is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Note that specific signal exchanges by serial communication between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 9-22 and 9-34 to 36.

   The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sends a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls paid out and a ball lending number signal indicating the number of lent balls to the terminal board (the external terminal board for the frame and the external terminal board for the board) via the output port 21TM372b. (Including and) output to 21TM160. Although a driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, it is omitted in FIG. 9-2.

  Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 by the 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Further, a signal for instructing turning on / off is output to the award ball LED 21TM053 and the out-of-ball LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. A detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

  Further, the drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. Although a driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, it is omitted in FIG. 9-3.

  A card unit control microcomputer is installed in the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the game machine. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connecting stand direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp and a card insertion slot. A frequency display LED 21TM060, a ball lendable LED 21TM061, a ball lending switch 21TM062, and a return switch 21TM063 are connected to the interface board (relay board) 21TM066.

  From the interface board 21TM066 to the card unit 21TM050, a ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are given according to the operation of the player. .. Further, the card unit 21TM050 gives a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lendability display signal to the interface board 21TM066. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal) and a pachinko machine operation signal ( (PRDY signal) is transmitted and received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066, as shown in FIG. 9-2.

  When the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. Further, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connected state / unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 according to the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit controlling microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050, and when detecting the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to give the player a predetermined number of lent balls. Pay out. Then, when the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 lowers the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. After that, on condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the on state, when the payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the prize ball payout control is executed.

  The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in the AC24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage not lower than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. Is prevented.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured so that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the jackpot is changed. .. The set value is made up of 6 stages from 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value becomes smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage becomes gradually lower.

  FIGS. 9-4A to 9F are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, that is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for a big hit is set.

  As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1 is used, if the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is a variable display target. If the set value is "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", it will win the jackpot with a lower probability (1/300). ing. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1". There is a higher probability (1/280) than in some cases to win the jackpot. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The chances of winning the jackpot are higher than the case of "2" (1/280). Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9D, when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than in the case of "2" or "3". Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235) than in the case of "2", "3", and "4". Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even if is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/235) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of “2”, “3”, “4”, and “5”. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (F). When the hit determination value is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the jackpot win is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, it means to decide whether to control the big hit gaming state, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 is configured to determine whether or not to make a big hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (F). It is provided separately, and the determination of the big hit is performed by using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. Good.

  In this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a total of 6 setting values 1 to 6, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The settable values that can be set to 2, may be 3, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

  Here, the totalization of the game balls and the display of the accessory ratio on the main board 11 of this embodiment will be described.

  On the main board 11, information relating to the winning of the game, for example, the number of prize balls due to winning at the first starting winning opening (belt), the number of winning balls at winning at the second starting winning opening (Den Chu), and the large winning opening The number of prize balls due to winning the (Attacker), the total number of prize balls are input, the number of shot balls is totaled, and the display monitor 21TM029 shows that the number of prize balls due to winning the major prize opening (Attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The percentage of consecutive balls (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls from the second start prize hole (Den Chu) and the number of prize balls from the prize hole (attacker) to the total number of prize balls A certain winning ratio (%) and a base (%), which is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched, are displayed. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of award balls (the number of balls that have been obtained as consecutive winnings below) due to winning at the special winning opening (attacker) to the total number of award balls. The winning ratio is the number of prize balls from the 2nd starting prize hole (Den Chu) and the number of prize balls from the prize hole (attacker) among the total number of prize balls (the number of winning balls below) Is the proportion occupied by. The base is the ratio of the number of game balls launched to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls (total number of balls acquired below) is the number of prize balls due to winning at the special winning opening (attacker), the number of prize balls due to winning at the second starting winning opening (Den Chu), and the great winning opening. (Attacker) and the total number of prize balls by winning in the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the second starting winning opening (Den Chu). The special winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (Den Chu) are variable winning objects, and the expected winning percentage of the gaming balls changes as the passable width of the playing balls changes. is there. Also, the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the large winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (Den Chu) are fixed winning objects, and the passable width of the game ball is fixed. Therefore, the assumed winning rate of the game ball is a fixed character.

  As for the method of totaling and calculating the information regarding the winning of the game, regarding the consecutive ratio and the winning ratio, the winning ball to the first starting winning hole (navel) and the general winning hole (sode) in the number of prize balls of 6000 pieces Number (general prize balls), the number of ordinary electric player prize balls (Den Chu prize balls), which is the number of prize balls due to winning in the 2nd starting prize hole (Den Chu), depending on the prize for the big prize hole (attacker) The number of special electric role award balls (attacker award balls), which is the number of award balls, is calculated. The total is set as one set, and the continuous ratio (%) and the winning combination ratio (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60,000 pieces are calculated. It should be noted that the number of prize balls (general prize balls) due to winning the first starting prize hole (navel) and general prize hole (sode) to be totaled, the number of standard electric prize balls (the number of electric Chu prize balls), and the special electricity The number of winning prize balls (attacker prize balls) is recorded in a ring buffer provided for each set value, and has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets and is updated for each set. ing. In other words, 6000 11 sets of storage are stored in a considerable quantity (for example, several bytes), and the cumulative ratio (%) and combination ratio (%) of these totals can be calculated. As for the base, the number of game balls launched for the number of prize balls of 60,000 is totaled. The total is set as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60,000 prize balls to the number of game balls launched is calculated.

  The display monitor 21TM029 has a base calculated based on 6000 consecutive ratios (%), combination ratios (%), cumulative total ratios (%), combination ratios (%), and the last 60,000 prize balls. It is possible to switch and display the base 1 (%)) and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the last 60000 award balls every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). That is, six displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to display all, but the number of prize balls due to winning in the first starting winning opening (navel) and the second starting winning opening (Den Chu) are counted as the game progresses. The number of prize balls due to winning and the number of prize balls due to winning at the large winning opening (attacker) will change. Then, for example, if the number of prize balls won after displaying the consecutive ratio (%) of 6000 is reflected in the winning ratio (%) of 60,000 displayed thereafter, the number of winning balls is 6000. There is a possibility that a discrepancy may occur between the continuous ratio (%) and the combination ratio (%) of 60,000 pieces. Therefore, the number of prize balls by winning the first start winning a prize mouth (navel), the number of prize balls by winning the second starting prize winning hole (Den Chu), the number of prize balls by winning the major winning prize (attacker), the prize ball Such a discrepancy can be prevented by inputting and totaling the total number at a predetermined timing in switching display (for example, display timing of 6000 consecutive ratios (%)).

  In addition, the storage area for storing the information about the winning of the game in the present embodiment is provided for each set value, and the general winning award ball, the first starting winning award mouth ball, the ordinary electric role award ball, the special electric role The prize ball, the total prize ball, and the total hit amount are stored in a storage area (ring buffer) corresponding to the set value. Therefore, the continuous ratio, winning combination ratio, and base in this embodiment can be calculated individually for each set value.

  As an example of the calculation method below, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls due to winning at the second starting prize hole (Den Chu) and the number of prize balls due to winning at the large prize hole (attacker) A method of calculating the role ratio (role ratio (%)) when the total number of role acquisition balls is 42000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls refers to the total cumulative number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the number of winning balls is the cumulative total number of game media paid out by winning the game media in the attacker and Den Chu. Further, the number of consecutive winning prize balls means the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning the game media in the attacker. The total number of hits refers to the total number of game media hit in the pachinko gaming machine 1 until the number of prize balls reaches 60,000. Therefore, the continuous ratio can be obtained by the following equation (1). Further, the winning combination can be calculated by the following equation (2). Further, the base can be calculated by the following equation (3).

  Continuation ratio = [Number of balls obtained in succession / Total number of acquisitions] x 100 (1)

  Role ratio = [(number of consecutive winning roles + number of winning roles) / total number of winnings] x 100 (2)

  Base = [60000 (total number of prize balls) / total driving] x 100 (3)

  When the total number of prize balls is 60,000 and the number of balls acquired is 42000, the character ratio is calculated as 0.70 (three decimal places are rounded down) by dividing 42,000 by 60,000. However, since the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot perform calculation below the decimal point, calculation by the following method is required.

  First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of the accessory acquisition balls is multiplied by 100 to be 4200000. Then, 4200000 is divided by 60,000. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when the calculation result of up to three digits after the decimal point is obtained, it may be multiplied by 1000.

  Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then, 42000 is divided by 600. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, it is possible to obtain the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point. Here, when obtaining the calculation result of up to three digits after the decimal point, it is sufficient to divide by 1000.

  In the above example, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, but a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate the character ratio for a long period. In other words, in this example, 00EA60h is stored in the 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A410h is also stored in the 3-byte storage area for the number of winning accessory balls.

  Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform operations on values of maximum 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

  Here, a third calculation method performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate the calculation in the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the total number of prize balls is 00EA60h, the lower 1 byte of 60h is rounded down, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, 234 is calculated in decimal notation. Similarly, for the character acquisition ball number 00A410h, the lower 1 byte 10h is rounded down to calculate the character acquisition ball number 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 (273/100) to calculate 2. Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 78%.

  In the third calculation method, the calculation in the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes easy, but an error of + 12% occurs. However, the error is + 1% when the total number of prize balls and the number of winning accessory balls are both 10. That is, the error is reduced as the period for calculating the accessory ratio becomes longer, and the error is approximated to the original value.

The substrate case 21TM201 is made of a light-transmitting material, and the main substrate 11 and the display monitor 21TM029 are visible. The board case 21TM201 is provided with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat dissipation hole for radiating heat of the electric components of the main board 11. The display monitor 21TM029 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat dissipation hole is not directly in front. Therefore, the visibility of the display monitor 21TM029 is not obstructed by the heat radiation holes. Here, the “direct front” means the front directly from the viewpoint of the main board 11, and means between the employee who is going to visually recognize the main board 11 and the main board 11.
Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform operations on values of maximum 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

  Here, a third calculation method performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate the calculation in the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the total number of prize balls is 00EA60h, the lower 1 byte of 60h is rounded down, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, 234 is calculated in decimal notation. Similarly, for the character acquisition ball number 00A410h, the lower 1 byte 10h is rounded down to calculate the character acquisition ball number 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 (273/100) to calculate 2. Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 78%.

  In addition, a storage area (ring buffer, 10-set total buffer (total of information on game winnings stored in a ring buffer provided with 10 counters each having a maximum of 2 bytes), a prize ball The total number buffer) is not initialized when the reset button is operated and may be continuously stored. The ring buffer will be further described later. It should be noted that the checksum of the stored value is calculated, initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected, the value of the number of acquired balls is larger than the stored value of the total number of prize balls, Initialization of the memory area in which information about game winnings is stored when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of balls for continuous winnings is greater than the value of the number of balls acquired Processing may be performed. Further, the error display and the warning display may be performed without performing the initialization process, or the initialization process may be performed together with or after the error display and the warning display. The error display and warning display will be further described later.

  In the calculation of the winning ratio (%), if the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of winning role balls is 19876 as an example, the ratio is calculated by dividing 34977 as a divisor for 19876. It is calculated that the role ratio (%) is about 57.9%. When the game control microcomputer 100 performs a calculation, it is necessary to avoid calculation with a decimal point, and therefore the calculation formula is replaced as follows. In the division of 1987/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100, and the decimal point is rounded down, resulting in 1987/343 = 57.9475. Since the fractional part is rounded down, it is calculated that the winning combination ratio (%) is 57%, and it is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. In this example, there is an error in display from the value calculated by accurate calculation. There will be no.

  The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (other than the value of the most significant bit is 0), and the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of accessory acquired balls are 32799, respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when replaced by the calculation in the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327 = 100.3%, an error of + 0.3%. When the calculation is performed by rounding off the decimal point, for example, when the exact value is 69.9%, and when the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, 69% → 70% is displayed on the display 1 Although it is considered that the error of% is displayed, the role ratio (%) (or the continuous ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error even in the display of the error of 1%.

  Further, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100, and therefore, when the total number of acquired balls is less than 100, calculation cannot be performed. Further, when it is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. If it is less than 10000, the error exceeds 1%, which may result in a larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of balls acquired, the larger the error. Therefore, until the counter counts the total number of balls acquired (for example, 32768, which is the minimum value of 16 bits) of a specific number or more, the ratio (%) and continuous ratio (%) are not displayed on the display monitor. The fact that the error may be large even if the display is performed may be notified by emitting a dedicated LED, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

  The display monitor 21TM029 displays the winning combination ratio (%), the continuous ratio (%), and the base (%) on 7 segments, and switches each value every predetermined period (for example, every 5 seconds). To display. In this case, for example, while the winning ratio (%) is being displayed for 5 seconds, an event occurs that a game medium is newly won in the electric chu or attacker, and the value calculated accordingly is changed to the continuous ratio after 5 seconds ( If it is displayed as the value of (%), the value of the combination ratio (%) and the combination (%) may deviate. Therefore, it is preferable to calculate the winning combination ratio (%) and the continuous ratio (%) in the same interrupt and sequentially display the calculated values.

  Also, when the numerical value that can be displayed in 7 segments is set to 2 digits (for example, when 7 segments are provided in two), 100% cannot be displayed as 100. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. Although the display monitor 21TM029 shown in FIG. 9-5 (A) can display numerical values in the lower two digits, the numerical values may be displayed in this case as well without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, a numerical value may be displayed in a part of the upper 2 digits under a specific condition.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the game medium is detected by the sensors provided in the attacker and the electric Chu, and the number of prize balls is individually counted based on the detection result. The present invention is not limited to this, and uses a sensor provided after the discharge passages through which the game media won in the attacker and the game media won in the electric chu are discharged are combined, and the detection result is used. It is also possible to add up the number of character acquisition balls and the number of consecutive character acquisition balls.

  Hereinafter, the display of the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base will be described more specifically. In the present embodiment, the main board 11 is provided on the back surface side of the game board 2 (see FIG. 9-3). On the back side of the game board 2, in addition to the main board 11, peripheral boards such as the effect control board 12 are also provided.

  The RAM 102 on the main board 11 includes a gate passage number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, a third general winning number counter, and a fourth general winning number counter. A general prize number counter and a big prize number counter are provided. In addition, in the present embodiment, the form in which the number of winnings of the special winning opening (attacker) is totaled by the special winning number counter is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these first big winnings The first big prize number counter that counts the number of winnings to the mouth and the second big prize number counter that counts the number of winnings to the second big winning port are individually provided, and the number of winnings to the first big winning port is provided. Alternatively, the number of winnings to the second major winning opening may be individually counted, and the number of winnings may be summed to obtain the number of winnings to the attacker.

  The gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The first start prize number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start opening switch 22A. The second start prize number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the second start opening switch 22B. The first general prize number counter to the fourth general prize number counter are counters that count the number of game balls detected by the first general prize port switch to the fourth general prize port switch. The special winning number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.

  A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is connected to the power supply board shown in FIG. 9C. The clear switch 21TM052 is arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 at a position where an employee or the like cannot easily operate it. By operating the clear switch 21TM052, the data stored in the RAM 102, which will be described later, used for the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is cleared. The clear switch 21TM052 is a switch that is operated when the calculation of the ratio and the winning combination is impaired, such as when a failure occurs in the calculation of the ratio or the winning combination. Therefore, it is a switch that does not need to be operated during the collection of data for the normal calculation of the ratio and the winning combination. When the clear switch 21TM052 is operated, a clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 11 in addition to clearing the data.

  The RTC 106 is provided on the main board 11 as described above, and the RTC 106 can detect the current time. The RTC 106 can measure a predetermined time, elapsed time, and the like by performing initial settings, but in the present embodiment, the RTC 106 is capable of measuring the business hours of the game hall.

  The main board 11 is housed in a board case 21TM201 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A). A caulking pin 21TM011B is attached to the board case 21TM201. By providing the caulking pins 21TM011B, the main board 11 is completely enclosed in the board case 21TM201, and fraudulent acts on the main board 11 are prevented. The substrate case 21TM201 is a caulked substrate case (hereinafter, also referred to as "caulking substrate case").

  The display monitor 21TM029 is provided on the main board 11. Further, a sealing sticker 21TM011S for certifying that the main board 11 is enclosed is attached to the board case 21TM201. The seal sticker 21TM011S is attached, for example, across the removed portion of the substrate case 21TM201. The sealing sticker 21TM011S is arranged at a position distant from the main board 11, and is arranged at a position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 21TM029 is obstructed, such as directly in front of the display monitor 21TM029. In this way, the display monitor 21TM029 is arranged at a position not hidden by the seal sticker 21TM011S.

  The display monitor 21TM029 includes a first display unit 21TM029A, a second display unit 21TM029B, a third display unit 21TM029C, a fourth display unit 21TM029D and a fifth display unit 21TM029E. Each of the first display unit 21TM029A to the fifth display unit 21TM029E is composed of 7 segments which are formed by 7 segments that draw a letter "8" and dots which are arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. The first display portion 21TM029A to the fifth display portion 21TM029E can be lit and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white and the like. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing these colors in an extremely short cycle.

  Each item of display Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 9-5 (B) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. The first display unit 21TM029A in the first digit displays the aggregated set values (1 to 6) and the RAM clear notification that notifies the completion of the RAM clear executed by the CPU 103 after the processing in the setting change mode (“C”). ) Is displayed, the counting period is displayed on the second display portion 21TM029B of the second digit and the third display portion 21TM029C of the third digit, and the fourth display portion 21TM029D of the fourth digit and the fifth display portion of the fifth digit. Numerical values are displayed in percentage on 21TM029E. In Display No. 1, the short-term ratio is displayed, and in Display No. 2, the short-term ratio is displayed. In Display No. 3, the total cumulative total ratio is displayed, and in Display No. 4, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed. In addition, in display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the last 60,000 prize balls is displayed, and in display No 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the last 60000 prize balls is displayed. To be done.

  The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) is 6000. The period for obtaining the total sum means the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset.

  In the above example, the ratio, the winning combination, and the base are calculated independently of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the consecutive ratio may be a ratio of the total number of prize balls, which is occupied by the number of prize balls due to winning at the special winning opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the winning ratio is the proportion of the total number of prize balls, which is the number of prize balls due to winning at the second start winning port in the high base state and the number of prize balls due to winning at the large winning port in the jackpot gaming state. Good. Further, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

  When the short-term ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the short-term ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the second “Y7.” Is displayed on the display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. Moreover, when the short-term ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the short-term ratio of display No2 is displayed. In that case, the short-term combination ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, “A6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed, “A7.” Is displayed on the second display portion 21TM029B and the third display portion 21TM029C. When the total cumulative proportion of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative proportion is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display section 21TM029D and the fifth display section 21TM029E, and the total cumulative proportion of display No. 4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, “bL.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the base 2 of display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit "B6." Is displayed on the 21TM029B and the third display section 21TM029C. When the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) and the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. In this case, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (displayed as a percentage) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  The main board 11 enters from the special winning opening (attacker), the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening in calculating the ratio, the winning combination, and the base. The number of entered game balls and the number of game balls discharged from the discharge port are totaled. In the main process, the CPU 103 includes a gate switch 21, a first starting opening switch 22A and a second starting opening switch 22B, a count switch 23, and a first general winning opening switch to a fourth general winning opening switch, and an ejection opening switch 21TM070. Switch processing is performed to confirm the state of each switch (presence or absence of a detection signal).

  In this switch processing, based on the detection signal output from each switch, which entry area the game ball has entered is specified. Then, when the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passage number counter is added, and when the detection signals are output from the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, The values of the first starting prize number counter and the second starting prize number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 23, the value of the big prize number counter is added, and the first general winning opening switch, When a detection signal is output from the second general winning opening switch, the third general winning opening switch, or the fourth general winning opening switch, the first general winning number counter, the second general winning number counter, and the third general winning number The counter and the value of the fourth general winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the outlet switch 21TM070, the values of the driving number counter are added to each entry area. Aggregate of entering the number of game balls (the winning number of game balls to each of the winning openings). The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102.

  In this way, the step for totaling the number of game balls entering each entry area is also executed in a series of processes for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each entry area (switch state confirmation processing. By including it in the switch process), it is possible to count the number of game balls entering each entry area without running a separate counting program, that is, without causing the problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in execution programs. Has become.

  The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of prize balls by winning in each winning opening based on the total number of winning game balls in each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning opening. Let The number of prize balls by winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out for one prize in the prize hole by the number of winnings in the prize hole. The number of prize balls for winning game balls is predetermined for each prize hole.

  As shown in FIG. 9-6, the number of prize balls for each prize hole classified here is a general prize hole prize ball (a prize ball obtained by winning the first general prize hole to the fourth general prize hole (sode)). ), 1st starting prize hole award ball (award ball due to winning at the 1st starting award prize hole (navel)), ordinary electric role award ball (award ball due to award winning at Den Chu), special electric role award ball (to attacker) Is the number of prize balls). The RAM 102 also stores the total number of prize balls and the number of game balls hit. It should be noted that the CPU 103 separately counts the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening and the number of winning game balls to the first starting winning opening, but the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening and the first start. The number of winning game balls to the winning openings may be collectively tabulated. Further, the number of prize balls of the general winning award balls and the number of prize balls of the first starting winning award balls are individually calculated. The number of prize balls may be collectively calculated.

  The RAM 102 has a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of prize balls and the number of hits. The ring buffer is provided with ten first to tenth storage areas each having a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of prize balls for each of the 6000 prize balls, which is obtained by winning the prize. In this way, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). Further, the active buffer has a 0th storage area including a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of prize balls for each of the 6000 prize balls, which is obtained by winning the prize. In the 0th storage area, the number of prize balls for each winning opening, which increases as the game progresses, is added. The 11 storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin.

  Further, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area for each prize hole, a total sum of the number of prize balls (for 10 sets) and the number of hits stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area, and a total accumulation area. There is. The storage area for the total sum and the total sum for 10 sets is composed of a counter of maximum 3 bytes. Therefore, it is possible to store 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data, and up to 60,000 data can be reserved. I can remember.

  Further, the RAM 102 stores a ratio ratio combination ratio storage area for storing ratios and ratios of 10 sets and total cumulative total, a base for 10 sets (base 2) and a base for 10 sets of the previous time (base 1). And a base storage area for storing. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the winning ratio and the continuous ratio for 10 sets and the total cumulative total based on the number of prize balls based on the number of winning game balls to each winning opening for 10 sets and the total cumulative total. And the cumulative ratio and the cumulative ratio are stored in the ratio ratio storage area. Each of the combination ratio ratio storage areas for storing the combination ratios and the total ratios for 10 sets and the total sum is composed of a maximum 1-byte counter. For example, when storing the combination ratio and the continuous ratio for 10 sets and the total sum, it is possible to store them with a margin with a maximum 1-byte counter when storing them as integers.

  In addition, the CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the base for 10 sets by the number of hits of the game balls to each winning opening for 10 sets and the base for the 10 sets (base 2) and the previous time. The base (base 1) calculated by the number of hits to the number of winning game balls to each winning opening for 10 sets is stored in the base storage area. When the base 1 and the base 2 are stored as, for example, integers, they can be stored with a margin with a maximum 1-byte counter.

  Here, the memory space of the CPU 103 of the main board 11 will be described. FIG. 9-7 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU on the main board. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing the above-mentioned built-in register, ROM 101, RAM 102, and the like. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 9-7, the address / data signal line of the ROM 101 is a ROM area of the memory space (in the present embodiment, 0000H to 2FFFH (H indicates a hexadecimal number. The same), 0000H to 2FBFH. 2FC0H to 2FFFH are assigned to the program management area), and the CPU 103 specifies the ROM area and reads data from the ROM 101. Further, in the present embodiment, the ROM area is divided into eight areas from the first area to the eighth area for management, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H.

  The address / data signal line of the internal register is assigned to the register area (FE00H to FEBFH in the present embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads data from the internal register and transfers the data to the register via the register area. Write the data of.

  Further, the address / data signal lines of the RAM 102 are assigned to the RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 designates this RWM area to read data from the RAM 102 or to the RAM 102. Write data. Note that other areas (3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH) in the memory space are non-use areas.

  A RAM area (16K byte area of 0000H to 2FFFH in this embodiment) corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 is, as shown in FIG. 9-8, a RAM control area, a non-use area, a RAM data area and other areas. It is composed of. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area, instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction are stored. Reference data referred to by the above-mentioned control program is temporarily stored in the constituted control program data (may be simply referred to as control program data), and is stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area. (For example, the various lottery data described above) is temporarily stored.

  Further, in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to other areas, data used for displaying the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is temporarily stored. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area is provided with a storage area for storing the total sum of the number of prize balls for each winning opening and a storage area for the cumulative ratio of the total sum. Further, in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area, an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having a first storage area to a 10th storage area, and the number of prize balls for each winning opening (10 sets). Min) total storage area and 10 sets of proportion ratio storage areas. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area, data having different start addresses of the subroutines are stored.

  In the present embodiment, 1 byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and each of the above-mentioned data (instruction data, supplemental data, reference data) can be stored. , Management data) is data having a number of bytes (for example, 2 bytes) that exceeds 1 byte, the data is divided into 1 bytes and stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. is doing.

  In addition, the main board 11 controls the display monitor 21TM029 to display the continuous ratio, the winning combination, and the base. Here, the main board 11 controls to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 9-9 (A) is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 9-9 (A), when the display on the display monitor 21TM029 is started, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is first displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term ratio of display No1, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-1), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A and "y" is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. In addition, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the short-term serial ratio is 41%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character "1." is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term ratio of display No2, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display section 21TM029A and the "y" is displayed on the second display section 21TM029B, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-2). Is displayed, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. In addition, the short-term combination ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the short-term combination ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character "3." is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative ratio of display No3, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-3), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display section 21TM029A and "A" is displayed on the second display section 21TM029B. Character is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. The total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the total cumulative consecutive ratio is 58%, the character “5.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-4), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display section 21TM029A and “A” is displayed on the second display section 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. The total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character “6.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-5). The display of the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 1 of display No. 5, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-5), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display section 21TM029A and the “b” is displayed on the second display section 21TM029B. The character is displayed, and the character “L.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the base 1 calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D and the fifth display portion 21TM029E. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “0.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the display of display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-6). The display of the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 2 of display No. 6, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-6), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display section 21TM029A and the “b” is displayed on the second display section 21TM029B. The characters are displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. In addition, in the fourth display portion 21TM029D and the fifth display portion 21TM029E,
Base 2 calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls is displayed. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D, and the character "2" is displayed on the fifth display portion 21TM029E.

  Then, when the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-1). The short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. Thereafter, the short-term serial ratio of display No. 1 to the base 2 of display No. 6 are sequentially displayed every 5 seconds. As for the display color, only the short-term ratio of display No. 1 is green, and the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 to base 2 of display No. 5 is red. In this way, the display monitor 21TM029 switches and displays the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 every 5 seconds.

  Further, the display of the short-term combination ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 is, as shown in FIGS. Based on the operation of, when the set value is "1", the short-term ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, base 1, base 2 display, when the set value is "2" Short-term ratio, short-term ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, base 1, base 2 display, short-term ratio when setting value is 3, short-term ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative It is possible to sequentially change the display of the winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2. It should be noted that when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning combination ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, base 1 and base 2 are being displayed when the set value is "1", 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to "2", and the short-term ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative continuous ratio, and the total cumulative winning role are displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. The values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the set value “2”.

  If the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning combination ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 when the set value is “2”, 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to "3", and the short-term ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. The values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the set value “3”.

  If the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “3” is displayed, 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to “4”, and the short-term ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. The values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value "4".

  If the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning combination ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, base 1 and base 2 are being displayed when the set value is “4”, 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to "5", and the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning ratio, total cumulative running ratio, and total cumulative winning role displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E The values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the set value “5”.

  If the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning combination ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 when the setting value is "5", 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to “6”, and the short-term ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E The ratio, base 1 and base 2 numerical values are switched to the set value “6”.

  Then, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 when the set value is “6”, 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to "1", and the short-term ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative continuous ratio, and the total cumulative winning combination are displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. The values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “1”.

  Note that the display monitor 21TM029 of the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which the continuous ratio, winning combination, and base at each set value can be displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 21TM029 is not limited thereto. In the above, only one numerical value or only two numerical values may be displayed among these continuous ratios, winning combinations, and bases.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the consecutive ratio, the winning combination, and the base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, are calculated, and the consecutive ratio, the winning combination, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the history of the number of awarded prize balls may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 without calculating the ratio, the winning combination, and the base. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, on the display monitor 21TM029, only the short-term combination ratio is displayed in red, and the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 are displayed in green. The present invention is not limited to this, and the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative running ratio, and the total cumulative winning ratio are displayed in the same color. It may be displayed in the same color different from the combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, and the total cumulative combination ratio.

  In the main board 11, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the storages in the 0th to 10th storage areas in the ring buffer are updated. Furthermore, the storage of the ratio-combination ratio storage area for storing the combination ratio and the ratio of the 10 sets and the total accumulation for 10 sets is updated.

  In the update in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer. Further, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10, the numbers of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 0th to 9th storage areas are "27", "81", "120", "36", "225", and "87", respectively. It is assumed that the values are “66”, “117”, “45”, and “21”. At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 10th to 10th storage areas is set to "27", "81", and "8", respectively. Update to "120", "36", "225", "87", "66", "117", "45", "21". Further, the number of prize balls in the 0th storage area is set to “0”, and the number of prize balls in the 10th storage area is erased.

  When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th to 10th storage regions, the stored number of prize balls may be temporarily deleted and then a new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new prize ball number may be stored by overwriting the stored prize ball number.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. As shown in FIG. 9-11, when the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 executes a security check process which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, and then the game control main process of step S21TM1010 and thereafter. Start processing. In the game control main processing, the CPU 103 first makes necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (step S21TM1010). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1020), and the stack pointer designated address is set to the stack pointer (step S21TM1030). Next, wait is performed until the effect control board 12 starts its operation (step S21TM1040).

  Then, the CPU 103 initializes the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) (step S21TM1050), and then the RAM 102. The accessible state is set (step S21TM1060). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is This is a mode indicating an interrupt address.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-12, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM1110). When the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM1110; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM1310. When the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM1110; YES), the CPU 103 outputs the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting switch mounted on the power supply board) 21TM052 input through the input port. ) Is confirmed (step S21TM1120).

  When the ON state is detected in the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 shifts to the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed. . That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The processing state is controlled to the setting change mode based on the fact that

  With the shift to the setting change mode, the CPU 103 outputs the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal from the information output circuit 112 (step S21TM1130). As a result, in the external device such as a hall computer that manages the game information of each gaming machine, based on the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal being input, the setting of the gaming machine that is the output source of these signals is changed. It is possible to specify that the control is performed in the mode or the setting confirmation mode described later. Therefore, it becomes possible to inform the gaming machine (for example, a machine number or the like) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode on the display device included in the external device in a identifiable manner.

  Moreover, CPU103 transmits the setting change mode command which designates having controlled by the setting change mode as an effect control command with respect to the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1140). Based on the reception of the setting change mode command, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode. Therefore, it becomes possible to inform the image display device 5 that the game machine is controlled in the setting change mode.

  Then, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and displays it on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1150). Then, it waits for the operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (step S21TM1160) and waits for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (step S21TM1180).

  In the operation standby state of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the CPU 103 changes the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 every time the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM1160). (Step S21TM1170). For example, as will be described later, display control is executed in which the set value being displayed is incremented by 1 each time a setting change operation is accepted, and is returned to 1 after 6 is reached.

  Further, when the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 while waiting for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (YES in step S21TM1180), the CPU 103 sets the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 to The set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed (step S21TM1190). That is, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is overwritten with the displayed set value, and the set value is confirmed. Then, the confirmed set value (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1190).

  In step S21TM1160, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated (without being determined as YES in step S21TM1160), the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF (YES in step S21TM1180). (If determined), the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 match, so that the set value stored in the RAM 102 is stored. The setting value stored in the area is not changed.

  When the process of step S21TM1200 is executed, the setting change mode ends, and the CPU 103 shifts to the initialization process of step S21TM1410 shown in FIG. 9-13 described later.

  In the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 in step S21TM1120 described above, when the OFF state is detected (NO in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 can confirm the set value. Switch to confirmation mode. That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, but does not meet the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Based on this, the processing state is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  With the shift to the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 outputs the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal from the information output circuit 112 (step S21TM1210). As a result, in the external device such as a hall computer that manages the game information of each gaming machine, based on the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal being input, the setting of the gaming machine that is the output source of these signals is changed. It is possible to specify that the mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, it becomes possible to inform the gaming machine (for example, a machine number or the like) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode on the display device included in the external device in a identifiable manner.

  Moreover, CPU103 transmits the setting confirmation mode command which designates having been controlled by the setting confirmation mode as a production control command with respect to the production control board 12 (step S21TM1220). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, it becomes possible to inform the image display device 5 that the game machine is controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

  Then, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and displays it on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1230). Then, it waits for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (step S21TM1240).

  Further, when the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 while waiting for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (YES in step S21TM1240), the setting confirmation mode ends, and the CPU 103 returns to FIG. The process proceeds to step S21TM1320 shown in FIG. 13 to determine whether or not the power-off detection process has been executed.

  When it is determined in step S21TM1110 described above that the lock switch is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM1110), the CPU 103 causes the clear switch input via the input port as shown in FIG. 9-13. The state of the output signal (clear signal) of (setting switch mounted on the power supply board) 21TM052 is confirmed (step S21TM1310).

  In the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, if it is not in the ON state (NO in step S21TM1310), the CPU 103 executes the power failure detection process (see FIG. 9-14). It is determined whether or not the check data is stored in the predetermined backup area (step S21TM1320).

  In this example, as a case where the process of step S21TM1320 is executed, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF when the power is turned on. When the process of step S21TM1320 is immediately executed without shifting to either the mode or the setting confirmation mode, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF when the power is turned on. There is a case where the process moves to the setting confirmation mode on the basis of the existence, and the process of step S21TM1320 is executed after the end of the setting confirmation mode.

  When the backup data is stored, the CPU 103 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S21TM1330). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S21TM1330, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power failure detection process. When the power is restored after an unexpected power failure such as a power failure, the data in the backup RAM area should have been saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply was stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, the initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on, not when the power supply is stopped is restored (NO in step S21TM1330). It is determined and the process proceeds to step S21TM1410).

  If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM1330), the CPU 103 performs the game state restoration process (the process of step S21TM1340 and step S21TM1350) for returning the game control microcomputer 100 to the state when the power supply was stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set to the pointer (step S21TM1340), the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set to the work area (area in the RAM 102), and the step S21TM1360 is set. (Step S21TM1350). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, the initialization data of the area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing of steps S21TM1340 and S21TM1350, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as it is. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, restriction member state designation flag, initialized flag, etc.), output of output port An area in which the state is saved (output port buffer), a portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set, and the like. The set value storage area (the area in which the confirmed set value is stored) is also included in the portion that should not be initialized. In addition, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the serial ratio, the winning combination, and the base for each set value is stored is also included in the portion that should not be initialized.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads out the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1360). In the game control timer interrupt process to be described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command for restoration) as a command for restoration of power supply (step S21TM1370). Based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of restoration), the effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the power supply has been restored based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply. When the production control CPU 120 receives the backup command, the production device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like performs recovery from power interruption based on the data when the power supply is stopped. It is possible to notify that. Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting command transmission process of step S21TM1470.

  Incidentally, in step S21TM1310, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is on (step S21TM1310; YES), or if backup data is not stored in step S21TM1320 (step S21TM1320; NO), in step S21TM1330. If the result of the parity check is not normal (step S21TM1330; NO), initialization processing is executed (step S21TM1410).

  In this example, as a case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. When the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed immediately without shifting to either the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 On the basis of the fact that it is also OFF, on the condition that it is determined to be NO in either step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330, the process immediately proceeds to step S21TM1410 without shifting to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. When the synchronization process is executed and (3) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on, the mode is changed to the setting change mode. Based on the case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed after the end of the setting change mode and (4) the lock switch 21TM051 was ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 was OFF when the power was turned on. , There is a case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed on condition that it is determined to be NO in either step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330 after shifting to the setting confirmation mode. .

  In the initialization process, the CPU 103 first performs a RAM clear process (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear processing, the data (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stored, which is stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102, is cleared and the initial value is set. However, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clearing process. Further, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the serial ratio, the winning combination, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated for each set value. The value is not changed before the RAM clear process. Then, the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to notify that the gaming state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). By the RAM clearing process, predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for normal symbol determination) is initialized to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. Further, the predetermined area (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the normal symbol per determination random number) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 102. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set to the pointer (step S21TM1430), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set to the work area (step S21TM1440).

  In addition, by the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random number counter for normal symbol determination, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. for selectively performing processing according to the control state. An initial value is set in the flag.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the mode in which the mode is changed to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Further, the setting change mode on condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state), It may be possible to shift to the setting confirmation mode.

  After executing steps S21TM1430 and S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads out the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the game control timer interrupt process to be described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command that specifies that the initialization process has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends) (step S21TM1460). The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the initialization process is performed based on the reception of the initialization command. When the production control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the production control device 120 such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 may notify that the game state or the like has been initialized. It is possible. Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting command transmission process of step S21TM1470.

  CPU103 transmits the setting command which designates the setting value read in step S21TM1360 or step S21TM1450 to production control CPU120 (step S21TM1470). The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing the effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, the setting value can be suggested to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit game state ends different depending on the specified setting value.

  Then, the CPU 103 executes the setting process of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037 (see FIGS. 9-19 and 9-21). Further, the communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to an executable state.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). The CPU 103, for example, executes a process in accordance with the random number circuit setting program to set the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result.

  Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is taken every 2 ms.

  Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the display random number updating process (step S21TM1520) and the initial value random number updating process (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S21TM1510), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt enabled state is set. It is set (step S21TM1540). In the present embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when not a big hit and a random number for determining whether to reach when not a big hit, for display The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random numbers. In this embodiment, the initial value random number, the initial value of the count value of the counter (normal symbol per determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol is determined. It is a random number to do. A game control process for controlling the progress of a game to be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game display device, the variable winning ball device, the ball payout device, and other game devices provided in the game machine by itself. In the process of, or the process of transmitting a command signal to control other microcomputer, also referred to as the game device control process), the count value of the random number per ordinary symbol is one round (normal random number for per symbol determination) When the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values has been increased), the initial value is set to the counter.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, when the setting change mode is controlled, the CPU 103 transmits the setting change mode command (step S21TM1140) and then the power-on initialization command. (Step S21TM1460), a setting command is transmitted (step S21TM1470). Further, in the case of being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM1220) and then transmits a backup command at power-off recovery or an initialization command at power-on (step S21TM1370 or step S21TM1370). S21TM1460) and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM1470). Therefore, the CPU 120 for effect control can specify the end of the setting change mode based on the reception of the initialization command after receiving the setting change mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect. It is possible to notify the end of the setting change mode by the production device such as the lamp 9. Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control can specify the end of the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the backup command or the initialization command after receiving the setting confirmation mode command, and the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L, 8R. It is possible to notify the end of the setting confirmation mode by the production device such as the game effect lamp 9.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 9-14. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 9-14 is started, the CPU 103 first executes power-off detection processing (step S21TM1610). Then, it is determined whether or not a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615), and on the condition that the game stop error has not occurred (NO in step S21TM1615), a predetermined switch process is executed to switch. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the discharge port switch 21TM070 via the circuit 110 is determined (step S21TM1620). On the other hand, when the game stop error has occurred (YES in step S21TM1615), the switch process of step S21TM1620 is not executed, and the game is stopped as a result.

  For example, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, the open state of the glass door frame 3a, and a magnetic sensor (not shown) indicates an abnormality. The level of magnetism that is determined is detected, the level of vibration that is determined to be abnormal by the vibration sensor (not shown) is detected, and the level and frequency band that is determined to be abnormal by the radio wave sensor (not shown) It is determined that a game stop error has occurred based on the detection of the radio wave.

  Subsequently, when the game ball wins any of the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the big winning opening, and the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, that is, the first starting opening switch 22A. , When the detection signal is input from the second starting opening switch 22B, the count switch 23, the first general winning opening switch to the fourth general winning opening switch, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning by each detection signal is determined. The prize ball process (step S21TM1630) for setting and the like is executed.

  Next, the CPU 103 displays a winning information such as winning ratio information, a winning ratio, a base, and the like, and a display monitor for winning information such as winning ratio information, a winning ratio, a winning ratio, and a base calculated by the winning information process. The winning information display control process (step S21TM1650) displayed on 21TM029 is performed. After that, by executing a predetermined main side error process (step S21TM1660), the abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be executed if necessary according to the diagnosis result. In step S21TM1660, an abnormality (game stop error) is detected by the various sensors described in step S1615, and if an abnormality is detected, the abnormality detection flag is set and the step in the next timer interruption is performed. The game may be stopped in S21TM1615 (switch processing is not executed). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information, and payout information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output. (Step S21TM1670).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number value MR1 and the random number values MR1 to MR4 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S21TM1680). ). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S21TM1690). In the special symbol process process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform the control of the display operation in the device 4B, the opening / closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7, and the like in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S21TM1700). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off of the segment LED, etc.) on the ordinary symbol display device 20 by executing the ordinary symbol process processing, and the variable display of the ordinary symbol and the movable wings in the variable winning ball device 6B. It enables setting of tilting motion of one side.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes a command control process to transmit a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1710). As an example of these, in the command control processing, among the output ports included in the I / O 105 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit, the effect After setting the control data to the output port for transmitting the production control command to the control board 12, set the predetermined control data to the output port of the production control INT signal to turn on the production control INT signal for the predetermined time. Then, it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table by turning it off. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enable state, the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

  In the command control process of step S21TM1710, a command for notifying the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a command for notifying that the fluctuation pattern or the fluctuation display has ended It is possible to notify the effect control board 12 of the set value periodically by transmitting information including the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the existing command such as the above. Further, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) receives these commands from the main board 11 to execute the effect suggesting the set value at various timings such as during variable display and big hit game. May be.

  Next, the display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the processing related to the setting change mode (steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200 of the main processing) and RAM clear (steps S21TM1410 to S21TM1420 of the main processing) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (A), when the power is turned off (power is turned off) by the operation of a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped and the display monitor is displayed. The display on the 21TM029 ends.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (B), on the condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main process), a clerk at the amusement hall or the like clears the switch (setting switch). ) When the power is turned on while operating the 21TM052 (in the case of Y in step S21TM1120 of the main process), the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps S21TM1130 and S21TM1140 to set values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (this In the example, the setting value “1”) is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area on the display monitor 21TM029 (more accurately, the first display unit 21TM029A). (In this example, the set value "1") is displayed Step S21TM1150).

  Thus, in the state where the set value is displayed on the first display section 21TM029A, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (C), the CPU 103 causes the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 of the game shop clerk or the like to operate. Each time an operation is detected, the numerical value (setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is sequentially updated and displayed (step S21TM1170). For example, every time the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value (setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) displayed on the first display portion 21TM029A is changed to 1 → 2 → 3 → It is updated and displayed as 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → .... Here, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the setting value (in this example, the setting value “1”) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed by the operation. The setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (setting value “1” in this example) is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A when the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 described later is executed. (In this example, the setting value “2” stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is changed (overwritten).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (D), the CPU 103 detects that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade (YES in step S21TM1180), and stores the set value in the RAM 102. The stored setting value (setting value “1” in this example) is the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (setting value “2” stored in the setting information temporary storage area in this example). ) Is changed (overwritten), and the setting value (setting value “2” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is determined (step S21TM1190). At this time, the CPU 103 blinks the first display portion 21TM029A to notify the clerk of the game hall that the new setting value is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 and the control of the setting change mode is completed. (Setting completion notification) (step S21TM1200).

  After the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off once, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display section 21TM029A (in this example, the setting information temporary storage area is displayed). Neither the stored setting value “2”) nor the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (setting value “2” in this example) is changed. If the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A can be changed even after the set value is confirmed, it may be misunderstood that the set value can be changed even when the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is not changed after the lock switch 21TM051 is once turned off.

  Then, the setting change mode (steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) is ended, and the CPU 103 executes the RAM clearing process (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clearing process, the data (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.) that is stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 and indicates the game state at the time of power outage is cleared, and the initial value is set. By doing so, the game state is initialized, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear process. Further, when the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the hold storage is cleared. After the RAM clearing process is completed, the CPU 103 displays "C" on the first display unit 21TM029A to notify the clerk of the game hall or the like that the RAM clearing process has been executed (RAM clear notification). (Step S21TM1420). As a result, the store clerk or the like at the game hall recognizes that the initialization process has been executed after the setting change mode has been completed (the setting value has been confirmed). Then, by executing the processing of step S21TM1430 and thereafter, a game is possible, that is, a variation display result, a big hit type, a variation pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, and the like are executable.

  In the setting change mode of the present embodiment, as an initial display displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, a mode in which the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. The initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the setting change mode is not limited, but the setting value most advantageous to the player (“6” in this embodiment) or the most disadvantageous to the player. The set value (“1” in this embodiment) may be displayed.

  In addition, after the RAM clear notification, the CPU 103, after the notification of the RAM clear, causes the display monitor 21TM029 to perform a continuous ratio and a role corresponding to the confirmed set value (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102). You may make it display each total value, such as a ratio and a base. Further, for each set value, the aggregated values such as continuous ratio, winning combination, and base corresponding to each set value may be displayed in order (ascending order or descending order of the set value) on the display monitor 21TM029.

  When the power is shut off without the lock switch 21TM051 being turned off during the control of the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off. The setting values stored in the storage area have not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting values stored in the setting information temporary storage area are deleted.

  Next, the display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the processing of the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 9-16 (A), when the power is turned off (power is turned off) by the operation of a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped and the display monitor is displayed. The display on the 21TM029 ends.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9-16 (B), on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main processing), the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF. When the power is turned on in step S21TM1120 of the main process (N in step S21TM1120 of the main process), the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps S21TM1210 and S21TM1220 to set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (in this example, set values). “1”) is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and the set value (in this example, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area in the display monitor 21TM029 (more accurately, the first display unit 21TM029A)). The set value "1" is displayed (step S 1TM1230).

  Note that, unlike the case where the setting change mode is controlled, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated by a clerk or the like in the game hall, the first display unit The numerical value displayed on the 21TM029A (in this example, the setting value “1” stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is not updated and displayed. If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated by a store clerk or the like in the game hall while the setting confirmation mode is being controlled, the numerical value displayed on the first display section 21TM029A (this example Then, if the setting value “1”) stored in the setting information temporary storage area is updated and displayed, it may be misunderstood that the setting value can be changed in the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated during the control of the setting confirmation mode, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting The set value “1” stored in the information temporary storage area is not updated and displayed.

  Then, the CPU 103 ends the setting confirmation mode based on the detection of the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 by the store clerk or the like in the game arcade (YES in step S21TM1240). By executing the processing of step S21TM1320 and thereafter, a game is possible, that is, a variation display result, a big hit type, a variation pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, and the like are executable. That is, when the process of the setting confirmation mode is executed, the CPU 103 does not execute the process related to the RAM clear, except when it is determined as NO in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330.

  After the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, as described above, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display section 21TM029A (in this example, the setting information). Neither the setting value “1” stored in the temporary storage area nor the setting value (setting value “1” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed.

  As described above, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also in the ON state. When the condition for controlling the setting change mode is satisfied, the gaming machine is controlled in the setting change mode, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting change switch) ) When the condition for controlling the setting confirmation mode that the 21TM052 is in the OFF state is satisfied, the gaming machine is controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

  In order to change or display the set value (in order to shift to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode), the clerk at the amusement arcade turns on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on. At this time, the setting change mode is set. In order to shift to (1), the operation for further executing the initialization processing (operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052) is performed, and in order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, the initialization processing is executed. Do not operate. In this way, the clerk or the like of the game arcade can select whether to control the game machine in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (or not to control either) at the time of turning on the power, and perform the initialization process. It is also possible to select whether or not to execute.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the initialization process is not required to shift the gaming machine to the setting confirmation mode (RAM clear is not executed except when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Therefore, even if the clerk at the amusement hall wants to confirm the set value while the player is playing the game, even if the player turns off the power and then shifts to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the game state remains. It will not be initialized and will not be a disadvantage to the player. On the side of the game arcade, the setting confirmation mode allows confirmation of the set value without any trouble.

  Further, the CPU 103, in association with the end of the setting confirmation mode, displays the set value (set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) on the display monitor 21TM029, such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. Each aggregated value may be displayed. Further, for each set value, the aggregated values such as continuous ratio, winning combination, and base corresponding to each set value may be displayed in order (ascending order or descending order of the set value) on the display monitor 21TM029.

  9-17 is a setting change mode by the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, and game effect lamp 9) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when controlled in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. An example is shown in which the notification of the shift to the setting confirmation mode is performed. 9-17 (1) is an example of an image displayed on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode is controlled, and FIG. 9-17 (2) is an image display when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Examples of images displayed on the device 5 are shown.

  As shown in (A) of FIG. 9-17 (1), when the power is turned on (especially before the wait for the effect control board operation waiting in step S21TM1040 is completed), the activation of the effect control board 12 is not completed. Therefore, an image is not displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is in a state of not emitting light.

  Next, as shown in (B) of FIG. 9-17 (1), based on the fact that the setting change mode command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 is received in step S21TM1140 in the main process, effect control is performed. The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode, and can notify that effect. For example, the characters "settings are being changed" are displayed on the image display device 5, and a voice (for example, a voice "settings are being changed") is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to inform that the mode has been changed to the game. The effect lamp 9 is caused to emit light in a predetermined light emitting manner (for example, white blinking manner) to notify that the setting change mode has been entered. With such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change mode. It is possible to clearly understand that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in (B) of FIG. 9-17 (1), other display information (for example, effect design, small design, fourth design, right hit display, etc.) on the image display device 5 is not displayed.

  It should be noted that when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting change mode command, if the video signal is not ready to be supplied to the image display device 5 by the VDP (Video Display Processor) (that is, by the display control unit 123). When the image display device 5 is not controllable) until the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). The notification by the image display device 5 is not performed, but the audio notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. In other words, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a voice notifying that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode (for example, a voice "setting is being changed"), and the game effect lamp 9 is emitted in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode). By making it emit light, it is notified that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode. After that, when it becomes possible to supply the video signal to the image display device 5 (that is, when the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5), the audio notification and the light emission notification are performed. In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the characters "setting being changed" are displayed on the image display device 5.

  Then, as shown in (C) of FIG. 9-17 (1), based on the fact that the setting command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 is received in step S21TM1470 in the main processing (or in step S21TM1460, the CPU 103 is executed). Based on receiving the power-on initialization command transmitted to the production control board 12 from), the production control CPU 120 specifies that the game control microcomputer 100 has finished the setting change mode, It is possible to inform that effect. For example, a voice (for example, a voice "setting is being changed") is displayed on the image display device 5 to indicate that "the setting has been changed" and that the speaker 8L, 8R has output the setting change mode. By stopping the output and stopping the light emission by the game effect lamp 9 in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode), the end of the setting change mode is notified. With such a configuration, in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to notify that the setting change mode has ended, so that the setting change mode is changed. It will be possible to clearly grasp the end.

  Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 9-17 (1), the CPU 103 executes the processing of step S21TM1480 and subsequent steps of the main processing, and the game is ready (the game control timer interrupt processing is Along with the execution, the effect control command for displaying the demo screen on the image display device 5 is transmitted, and the effect control CPU 120 having received the command displays the demo screen on the image display device 5.

  As shown in FIG. 9-17 (2) (A), when the power is turned on (especially before the wait for the effect control board operation waiting in step S21TM1040 is completed), the activation of the effect control board 12 is not completed. Therefore, an image is not displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is in a state of not emitting light.

  Next, as shown in (B) of FIG. 9-17 (2), based on the fact that the setting confirmation mode command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 is received in step S21TM1220 in the main process, effect control is performed. The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode, and can notify that effect. For example, the image display device 5 displays the characters “setting confirmation”, and outputs a voice (for example, a voice “setting confirmation is in progress”) from the speakers 8L and 8R to inform that the mode has been changed to the setting confirmation mode. The effect lamp 9 is caused to emit light in a predetermined light emitting manner (for example, white blinking manner) to notify that the setting confirmation mode has been entered. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to clearly understand that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in (B) of FIG. 9-17 (2), other display information (for example, effect design, small design, fourth design, right hitting display, etc.) on the image display device 5 is not displayed.

  When the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting confirmation mode command, the video signal cannot be supplied to the image display device 5 by the VDP (Video Display Processor) (that is, by the display control unit 123). When the image display device 5 is not controllable) until the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). The notification by the image display device 5 is not performed, but the audio notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. In other words, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a voice notifying that the setting confirmation mode has been entered (for example, a voice "setting is being changed"), and the game effect lamp 9 is emitted in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode). By making it emit light, it is notified that the setting confirmation mode has been entered. After that, when it becomes possible to supply the video signal to the image display device 5 (that is, when the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5), the audio notification and the light emission notification are performed. In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the image display device 5 displays the characters “under confirmation of setting”.

  Then, as shown in (C) of FIG. 9-17 (2), on the basis of receiving the setting command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM1470 in the main processing (or step S21TM1370 or step S21TM1370). Based on the fact that the backup command at power-off recovery or the initialization command at power-on sent from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in S21TM1460 is received), the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the effect control CPU 120. It is possible to specify that the confirmation mode has ended and notify that effect. For example, the voice of "setting confirmation completed" is displayed on the image display device 5 to inform that the mode has been changed to the setting confirmation mode output from the speakers 8L and 8R (for example, the voice "setting confirmation is in progress"). By stopping the output and stopping the light emission by the game effect lamp 9 in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode), it is notified that the setting confirmation mode has ended. With such a configuration, in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to notify that the setting confirmation mode has ended. It will be possible to clearly grasp the end.

  Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 9-17 (2), the CPU 103 executes the processing of step S21TM1480 and subsequent steps of the main processing, and the game is ready (the game control timer interrupt processing is Along with the execution, the effect control command for displaying the demo screen on the image display device 5 is transmitted, and the effect control CPU 120 having received the command displays the demo screen on the image display device 5.

  The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing the effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, the setting value can be suggested to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit game state ends different depending on the specified setting value. FIGS. 9-18 (1), (2), and (3) show examples of setting suggestive effects. 9-18 (1) shows an example in which the ending image in the "sunny" mode is selected on the big hit ending screen, and in FIG. 9-18 (2), the ending screen in the "cloudy" form is selected on the big hit ending screen. For example, FIG. 9-18 (3) shows an example in which the ending image in the “rain” mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. FIG. 9-18 (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestive effect based on the setting value designated by the setting command.

  In step S21TM1470 of the main processing, the CPU 103 transmits a setting command designating a setting value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when the jackpot gaming state is over, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing an ending effect on the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 can determine the mode of the ending effect based on the stored setting value by storing the setting value specified by the received setting command in the RAM 102. For example, based on the effect control command transmitted when the jackpot gaming state is finished, the image display device 5 is stored together with a character (character of "BONUS end") informing that the jackpot gaming state is ended. It is possible to display an ending image in a mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rainy mode) determined based on the set value.

  In the table shown in FIG. 9-18 (4), the setting values designated by the setting command are "1, 2", "3, 4", and "5, 6". , When the mode of the setting suggestive effect is determined to be the “clear” mode shown in FIG. 9-18 (1), when it is determined to be the “cloudy” mode shown in FIG. 9-18 (2), and FIG. When the “rain” mode shown in 18 (3) is determined, the determination value of is assigned.

  When the setting value designated by the received setting command is “1” or “2”, the effect control CPU 120 suggests the setting of the “fine” mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It was decided to execute the effect (ending effect), and it was decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a medium ratio (for example, 40%). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “rain” mode shown in (3) at a rate of 40% (for example, 40%). Further, when the setting value designated by the received setting command is "3" or "4", the effect control CPU 120 is in the "fine" mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%). It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “rain” mode shown in (3) at a rate (for example, 30%). When the setting value designated by the received setting command is "5" or "6", the effect control CPU 120 has a high rate (for example, 50%) of the "clear" mode shown in (1). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “rain” mode shown in (3) at the ratio (for example, 30%).

  In this way, by varying the determination rate of each mode of the setting suggestion effect according to the set value, the player becomes interested in how the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the setting suggestion effect is performed. The interest of the production can be improved. In this example, the player becomes interested in how the ending effect executed when the jackpot gaming state ends is executed, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the "sunny" mode. You will expect to be done.

  Next, the prize ball process (step S21TM1630) in the main process will be described. First, a payout control signal (connection confirmation signal) and a prize ball request signal (payout control command) transmitted and received between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 will be described.

  9-19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a control signal output from the game control microcomputer 100 to the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, a connection confirmation signal is transmitted and received as a control signal between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various kinds of control relating to payout control and the like. As shown in FIG. 9-19, the connection confirmation signal is output when the main board 11 rises (when the game control microcomputer 100 starts the game control processing), and the main board 11 is sent to the payout control board 21TM037. Is a signal (a connection confirmation signal of the main board 11) for notifying that the start has occurred. The connection confirmation signal indicates that the prize balls can be paid out. The connection confirmation signal is output through the I / O port 21TM057 and the output circuit 21TM067 of the game control microcomputer 100, and the payout control is performed through the input circuit 21TM373A and the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Input to the microcomputer 21TM370 for use. Each connection confirmation signal is 1-bit data and is transmitted by one signal line. Note that the connection confirmation signal becomes ready for output by setting an initial value to the bit corresponding to the connection confirmation signal of the output port 0 by the processing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440 executed when the power is turned on (specifically, Is output by the process of step S21TM2080, but it may be output at the timing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440).

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, like the game control microcomputer 100, has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380. Further, various payout control commands are transmitted and received between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built in the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 incorporated in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are the same as the configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 9-20 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of control commands transmitted and received between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, various control commands (prize ball request signals) are transmitted and received between the microcomputers of the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various kinds of control relating to payout control and the like.

  As described above, the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal are composed of 8-bit data (binary 8-digit data), and output as a control command indicating a predetermined content depending on the set content of the 8-bit data. To be done.

  The connection confirmation command is sent from the game control microcomputer 100 at regular intervals (1 s) to confirm whether or not the connection state between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal. This is a control command to be transmitted. The data content of the connection confirmation command is "A0 (H)", that is, "1010000".

  The connection OK command is a control command for notifying that the connection state between the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a connection confirmation command. Is a control command transmitted as a response signal in response to the reception of. The data content of the connection OK command is “8x (H)”, that is, “10000xxx”. If a prize ball error (an abnormal state in which a prize ball payout operation based on a prize or a ball lending operation based on a ball lending request cannot be normally performed) occurs, the first bit "x" Is set to "1". When a full tank error occurs, "1" is set in the second bit "x". Further, when the out-of-ball error occurs, "1" is set to the "x" of the third bit. When a door open error occurs, "1" is set in the "x" of the 4th bit. In this way, while the connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is being confirmed, the occurrence of a predetermined error in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is detected by the game control microcomputer. 100 can be notified.

  The prize ball number command is a control command for notifying the number of game balls (0 to 14) for which a payout request is made, and is a control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100 based on the occurrence of a prize. . The data content of the prize ball number command is “5x (H)”, that is, “0101xxxx”. In this embodiment, when the game balls are detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B, three prize balls are paid out, and the winning opening switch corresponding to the general winning opening 10 is used to play the game balls. When it is detected, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, 14 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, when a game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B, a prize ball number command "01010011" for notifying the number of three prize balls is transmitted to the general winning opening 10. When a game ball is detected by the corresponding winning opening switch, a prize ball number command "01011010" for notifying the number of 10 prize balls is transmitted, and when a game ball is detected by the count switch 23, the number of prize balls is detected. A prize ball number command “0101110” for notifying 14 is transmitted. Note that either the connection confirmation command or the prize ball number command is configured to be transmitted as a prize ball request signal. It should be noted that the prize ball number command is transmitted in place of the connection confirmation command at the timing when the connection confirmation command is transmitted based on the condition for paying out the prize balls (occurrence of winning or the like) being established. In this embodiment, as described above, the data corresponding to the number of prize balls is set in the upper 4 bits, but the upper 4 bits are made common and the data corresponding to the number of prize balls is set in the lower 4 bits. You may do it.

  The prize ball end command is a control command indicating that the prize ball operation (prize ball payout operation) has ended, and is a control command transmitted by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the end of the prize ball operation. The data content of the prize ball end command is "50 (H)", that is, "01010000". The prize ball end command is transmitted instead of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is transmitted based on the end of the prize ball operation. In this embodiment, data indicating error information is not set in the prize ball end command. This is because the prize ball end command is transmitted only once when the prize ball operation is completed, so that data indicating error information is set and sent to the next connection OK command without sending error information at that timing. It is possible to do so. Data indicating error information may be set in the lower 4 bits of the prize ball end command.

  The award ball preparation command is a control command for notifying that a predetermined error has occurred and the award ball operation has not ended, and a predetermined error occurs while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executing the award ball operation. This is a control command to be transmitted based on what is done. The data content of the connection OK command is “8x (H)”, that is, “10000xxx”. Here, when a prize ball error occurs, "1" is set to the first bit "x". When a full tank error occurs, "1" is set in the second bit "x". Further, when the out-of-ball error occurs, "1" is set to the "x" of the third bit. When a door open error occurs, "1" is set in the "x" of the 4th bit. In this manner, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the prize ball operation has not ended due to a predetermined error during execution of the prize ball operation in the game control microcomputer 100. The content of the error can be notified to the game control microcomputer 100 as well. Like the connection OK command, the award ball preparing command notifies that a predetermined error has occurred by changing the contents of the lower 4 bits according to the error state (changes the predetermined bits). Further, any one of the connection OK command, the award ball preparing command, and the award ball end command is configured to be transmitted as a received ACK signal. The prize ball preparing command is a command (signal) that is output not only when an error occurs and the prize ball operation cannot be executed but also when the prize ball operation is being executed.

  Note that the prize ball preparing command is transmitted in place of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is transmitted, based on the state where the prize ball operation cannot be performed due to an error. is there.

  9-21 is a block diagram showing signal lines and the like used for transmitting and receiving the control signal shown in FIG. 9-19 and the control command shown in FIG. 9-20. As shown in FIG. 9-21, the connection confirmation signal is output by the game control microcomputer 100 via the output circuit 21TM067 and input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the input circuit 21TM373A. Further, the connection confirmation command and the number of prize balls command of the control commands are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM505 incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100 and input to the serial communication circuit 21TM380 incorporated in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. It Among the control commands, the connection OK command, the prize ball end command, and the prize ball preparing command are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the serial communication circuit included in the game control microcomputer 100. 21 TM505 is input. In FIG. 9-21, two signal lines (a signal line for transmitting a prize ball request signal and a signal line for transmitting a reception ACK signal) are shown as signal lines for performing serial communication. However, in reality, the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal are transmitted and received by one signal line.

  Next, transmission / reception of signals (prize ball request signal, reception ACK signal; control command) between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation will be described. The prize ball request signal includes a connection confirmation command and a prize ball number command, and the received ACK signal includes a connection OK command, a prize ball end command, and a prize ball preparing command.

  FIG. 9-22 is a sequence diagram showing signal transmission / reception between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIG. 9-22, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the signal line connection with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is disconnected via the serial communication circuit 21TM505. , And sends a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal via the serial communication circuit 21TM380, it sends a connection OK command as a received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, it transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the time of reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

  Next, the operation of the payout control board 21TM037 will be described. FIG. 9-23 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the main processing, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 first performs necessary initial settings. That is, the payout control CPU 21TM371 first sets the interruption prohibition (step S21TM1810). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1820), and the stack pointer designated address is set to the stack pointer (step S21TM1830). Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets the built-in device register (step S21TM1840), sets the CTC and PIO (step S21TM1850), and then sets the RAM to the accessible state (step S21TM1860). Also, 0000 (H) is set as the initial value of the prize ball unpaid number counter (step S21TM1870).

  In this embodiment, one channel of the built-in CTC is used in timer mode. Therefore, in the setting process of the built-in device register of step S21TM1840 and the process of step S21TM1850, the register setting for setting the channel to be used in the timer mode, the register setting for permitting interrupt generation, and the interrupt vector are set. Register setting is performed. Then, the interrupt by that channel is used as a timer interrupt. When it is desired to generate a timer interrupt every 2 ms, for example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register).

  The interrupt vector set in the channel set in the timer mode (channel 3 in this embodiment) corresponds to the start address of the timer interrupt process. Specifically, the start address of the timer interrupt process is specified by the value set in the I register and the interrupt vector. The timer interrupt process includes a payout control process for controlling the payout means (including at least a process of driving the payout motor 21TM289 in accordance with a command signal related to prize ball payout from the main board, and driving the payout motor 21TM289 in response to a ball lending request). May be included.) Is executed.

  In this embodiment, the interruption mode 2 is also set in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, the interrupt processing based on the count-up of the built-in CTC can be used. Further, it is possible to set an interrupt processing start address according to the interrupt vector sent by the CTC. The CTC channel 3 (CH3) count-up interrupt is an interrupt that occurs when the CPU internal clock (system clock) is counted down and the register value becomes "0", and is used as a timer interrupt. .

  Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 first performs a RAM clearing process (step S21TM1880). In addition, initial values are set in the flags and counters in the RAM area (step S21TM1890). The process of step S21TM1890 includes a process of setting the initial value of the unpaid prize ball number counter to the unpaid prize ball number counter.

  Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a serial communication circuit setting process for initializing the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1900). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 causes the serial communication circuit 21TM380 to perform serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100 according to the same process as the serial communication circuit setting process (see step S21TM2560) performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100. Settings for.

  When the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is initialized, the payout control CPU 21TM371 initializes the priority order of the interrupt processing executed in response to the interrupt request of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1910). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 initializes the priority order of the interrupt process according to the same process as the priority order initialization process performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100.

  Then, the register of the CTC provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken periodically (step S21TM1920). That is, a value corresponding to the timer interrupt generation interval is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). Since the interrupt is prohibited in step S21TM1810 of the initialization process, the interrupt is permitted before the initialization process is completed (step S21TM1930). After that, a loop process for monitoring the occurrence of a timer interrupt is started.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the built-in CTC of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to repeatedly generate the timer interrupt. When the timer interrupt occurs, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes a timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 9-24 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interrupt processing executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the timer interrupt process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the following process as the payout control process. First, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs an input determination process (step S21TM2010). The input determination process is a process of detecting the states of bits 4 to 6 of input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of input port 1 and reflecting the detection result in a predetermined 1 byte of RAM (referred to as an input state flag). is there. In the payout control process, when control is performed based on the states of bits 4 to 6 of input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of input port 1, the state of the input port is not checked directly, but the state of the input port is checked. Check flag status.

  Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a payout motor control process (step S21TM2020). In the payout motor control process, when the payout motor 21TM289 is to be driven, a process for outputting the pattern of the payout motors φ1 to φ4 to the output port 0 is performed.

  Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a prepaid card unit control process for communicating with the card unit 21TM050 (step S21TM2030). Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a main control communication process described later (step S21TM2035). Further, a prize ball lending control process for controlling the payout of the loan balls in response to a ball lending request from the card unit 21TM050, and for controlling the payout of the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command from the main board. Is executed (step S21TM2040).

  Then, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes error processing for detecting various errors (step S21TM2050). In addition, information output processing for outputting prize ball information and ball lending information output to the outside of the gaming machine is executed (step S21TM2060). In addition, a predetermined display is performed on the error display LED 21TM374 according to the result of the error processing, and display control processing for turning on the award ball LED 21TM053 and the out-of-ball LED 21TM054 is executed (step S21TM2070).

  In the present embodiment, when various errors (for example, full tank error, out-of-ball error, prepaid card unit non-connection error) are detected in error processing described later, an error bit corresponding to the detected error is set. Then, in the display control process of step S21TM2070, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs a predetermined display on the error display LED 21TM374 based on that the error bit is set. In the display control process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs control for turning on the prize ball LED 21TM053 when the prize ball payout is being performed. When the prize ball payout is completed, control is performed to turn off the prize ball LED 21TM053.

  Further, in this embodiment, a RAM area (output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, output port 2 buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the payout control CPU 21TM371 outputs The contents of the port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, and output port 2 buffer are output to the output port (step S760: output processing). The output port 0 buffer, the output port 1 buffer, and the output port 2 buffer have a payout motor control process (step S21TM2020), a prepaid card control process (step S21TM2030), a main control communication process (step S21TM2035), and an information output process (step S21TM2060). And the display control process (step S21TM2070).

  Next, in the main control communication process of step S21TM2035, the operation of the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmitting and receiving various commands will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-21, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for serially communicating various commands with the game control microcomputer 100. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command shown in FIG. 9-20 from the game control microcomputer 100 by using the serial communication circuit 21TM380. In addition, when the prize ball number command is received, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 uses the serial communication circuit 21TM380 to transmit the prize ball ACK command “D2” as a reception confirmation signal.

  Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371, like the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, if there is an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 while in the interrupt enable state, the serial communication circuit 21TM380 makes an interrupt request. Perform interrupt processing according to the cause. In this embodiment, when the payout control CPU 21TM371 specifies that the cause of the interrupt is that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 has received the received data, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes the reception interrupt process. In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets the reception interrupt flag indicating that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is receiving the reception data. Note that the payout control CPU 21TM371 may read data from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 instead of setting the reception interrupt flag in the reception interrupt process. In this case, for example, the payout control CPU 21TM371 determines whether or not the read reception data is a prize ball number command in the reception interrupt process. When the received data is the prize ball number command, the payout control CPU 21TM371 may add the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number command to the prize ball unpaid number counter. By doing so, in the main control communication process described later, it is determined whether or not the received data is a prize ball number command based on the reception interrupt flag being set, and the prize ball number is determined as the prize ball number. It is not necessary to execute the process of adding to the unpaid number counter.

  FIG. 9-25 is for a ball lending executed between the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370), the payout motor 21TM289, and the card unit 21TM050. 3 is a block diagram for explaining the communication process of FIG. Here, as will be described later, as a method of limiting the ball lending by the payout motor 21TM289, there are the following first ball lending limiting method to fourth ball lending limiting method.

  First, (1) the first ball lending limitation method, during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) to the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer This is a method of stopping the output of the connection confirmation signal to the computer 21TM370). In addition, (2) the second ball lending restriction method, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the PRDY from the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the card unit 21TM050. This is a method of stopping signal output. (3) In the third ball lending restriction method, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. During the period, the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) stops the output of the signal for driving the payout motor 21TM289 to the payout motor 21TM289. In addition, (4) the fourth ball lending restriction method is EXS from the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the card unit 21TM050 during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. This is a method of stopping signal output.

  The transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involves turning off the power supply (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and then turning on the power supply, so the state of the gaming machine is unstable. If the payout control corresponding to the ball lending process is executed in such an unstable state, it may not be possible to pay out an appropriate number of game media corresponding to the lending request. In order to prevent the disadvantage of the player in such a situation, in the following embodiments, the ball lending in the gaming machine controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is restricted. Hereinafter, the first to fourth ball lending restriction methods will be specifically described.

  FIG. 9-26 is a timing diagram for explaining communication between the main board 11, the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050 of the gaming machine. Based on the fact that the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is on, the payout control board 21TM037 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible. The connection confirmation signal is turned on in the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 9-13 (see FIG. 9-19). When power supply is started, the card unit 21TM050 turns on the VL signal as a connection signal.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on that the PRDY signal is in the ON state. Output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control board 21TM037 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal being both in the ON state. When the trailing edge (OFF) of the BRQ signal is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of lent balls to the player. Then, the payout control board 21TM037 lowers the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050. That is, the EXS signal is turned off.

(First ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
As a method of limiting the ball lending in the period controlled by the setting change mode, there are the above-mentioned first ball lending limiting method to the fourth ball lending limiting method. First, the first ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 9-27.

  FIG. 9-27 is a main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and a payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the communication processing performed between control microcomputer 21TM370) and card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state, so the CPU 103 changes the setting. The connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is OFF while the mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed.

  While the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state, and therefore the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal but turns it off even if the VL signal is in the on state, that is, even if it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state, instead of keeping it in the ON state, based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the process is being executed, the ball lending (paying of the game medium) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

  As described above, during the period in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 does not turn on the connection confirmation signal, so that the game medium payout control by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is performed. You can prevent it from running. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not executed (the ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the PRDY signal is not turned on.

  Based on the fact that when the CPU 103 finishes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 causes the payout control board 21TM037 to output the BRDY signal based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both on, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

  In addition, during the game (the state in which the timer interrupt process for the game control can be executed), the configuration that can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by the operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is adopted. Even in such a case, the first ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-27 can be applied. That is, the game control microcomputer 100 stops the output of the connection confirmation signal (switches from the ON state to the OFF state) based on being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, when the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns off the PRDY signal or does not turn on the EXS signal, so that the ball lending is executed. Try not to be done.

(Second ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the second ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 9-28, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state also during the period in the setting confirmation mode. I shall. That is, unlike the example shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on during the setting change mode. Shall be. Further, unlike the example shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state at the timing before being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, and the ON state is maintained during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

  FIG. 9-28 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the communication processing performed between control microcomputer 21TM370) and card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main substrate 11 to the payout control substrate 21TM037 is turned on, the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIG. 9-28, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops the transmission of the connection confirmation command based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As described above, the connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication state with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation command is not received from the game control microcomputer 100. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, in a state where it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, in the game control microcomputer. Even when it is electrically connected to 100), the PRDY signal is turned on while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (while the connection confirmation command is not received). The state is turned off instead of the state.

  As a result, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state, instead of keeping it in the ON state, based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, when the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the ball lending (game medium payout) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

  In this way, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side that has not received the connection confirmation command because the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command while the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled. Therefore, the PRDY signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible not to execute the payout control of the game medium by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not executed (the ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the PRDY signal is not turned on.

  When the CPU 103 finishes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the transmission of the connection confirmation command is restarted. Based on restarting the reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 causes the payout control board 21TM037 to output the BRDY signal based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both on, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

  In addition, during the game (the state in which the timer interrupt process for the game control can be executed), the configuration that can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by the operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is adopted. Even in this case, the second ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-28 can be applied. In addition, the PRDY signal can be output (ON state) regardless of whether the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (ON state or OFF state). Even if such a configuration is adopted, the second ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-28 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not receive the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and therefore the PRDY signal is in the ON state. Is turned off. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed while the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled.

(Third ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the third ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In this embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and do not open the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation. As long as it is inoperable, in order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened. That is, it is usual that the gaming machine frame 3 is opened during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. That is, during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3. Become. As described above, the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected includes the period in which the setting change mode is controlled and the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

  FIG. 9-29 is a main board when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining a communication process performed between the payout control board 21TM037 (dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050.

  In the example of FIG. 9-29, based on the fact that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Therefore, the PRDY signal is not turned on. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, in a state where it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, in the game control microcomputer. Even when it is electrically connected to 100), while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state), The PRDY signal is turned off without being turned on.

  As a result, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state, instead of keeping it in the ON state, based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a), the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ. Since both the signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Lending (paying out game media) is not executed.

  As described above, during the period in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). The PRDY signal is not turned on by detecting the open state of. In this way, it is possible not to execute the payout control of the game medium by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not executed (the ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the PRDY signal is not turned on.

  Then, when the store clerk or the like in the game arcade operates the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state, the CPU 103 ends the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, a store clerk or the like in the game arcade closes the game machine frame 3 in order to put the pachinko game machine 1 in a playable state, so that the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 21TM300 stops detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3. With the closing of the gaming machine frame 3, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 causes the payout control board 21TM037 to output the BRDY signal based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both on, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

  In addition, during the game (the state in which the timer interrupt process for the game control can be executed), the configuration that can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by the operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is adopted. Even in this case, the third ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-29 can be applied. In addition, the PRDY signal can be output (ON state) regardless of whether the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (ON state or OFF state). Even if such a configuration is adopted, the third ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-29 can be applied. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the gaming machine frame 3 ( Alternatively, the PRDY signal is not turned on based on the detection of the open state of the glass door frame 3a). As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed while the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled.

  In this embodiment, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the detection signal of the open state is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is not limited to such a configuration, and may be provided on the main board 11 (the detection signal of the open state is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In the case of such a configuration, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is based on that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Then, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped (switched from the ON state to the OFF state). As a result, when the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns off the PRDY signal or does not turn on the EXS signal, so that the ball lending is executed. Try not to be done.

(Fourth ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the fourth ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIG. In the example illustrated in FIG. 9-30, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. I shall. That is, unlike the example shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on during the setting change mode. Shall be. Further, unlike the example shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state at the timing before being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, and the ON state is maintained during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

  FIG. 9-30 is a main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and a payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the communication processing performed between control microcomputer 21TM370) and card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main substrate 11 to the payout control substrate 21TM037 is turned on, the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIG. 9-30, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops the transmission of the connection confirmation command based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As described above, the connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication state with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal based on the connection confirmation signal being on. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is kept in the ON state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, in a state where it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, in the game control microcomputer. 100), the PRDY signal is turned on regardless of whether the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  If the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and a ball lending switch signal is input while the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 Based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state, the BRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Here, in the payout control board 21TM037, the PRDY signal is in the ON state, and both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, but the connection confirmation command is not received from the game control microcomputer 100. Based on this, the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 is not turned on. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, in a state where it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, in the game control microcomputer. 100 is in a state of being electrically connected), the PRDY signal is in an ON state (that is, the payout control board 21TM037 allows a payout operation), and the BRDY signal is in an ON state (that is, a ball lending switch 21TM062). Is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input), and the BRQ signal is in the ON state (that is, the state in which the predetermined delay time has elapsed since the BRDY signal was turned on), the CPU 103 sets While executing change mode or setting confirmation mode processing (while the connection confirmation command is not received) It is without EXS signal ON state to the OFF state. Thus, even when the connection confirmation signal, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, when the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the EXS signal is in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the ball lending (payout of the game medium) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

  In this way, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side that has not received the connection confirmation command because the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command while the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled. Therefore, the EXS signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible not to execute the payout control of the game medium by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to inform that the ball lending is not executed (the ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the EXS signal is not turned on.

  Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops the output of the BRQ signal when the EXS signal remains in the OFF state for a predetermined time after the BRQ signal is turned on (when the timer set to a predetermined value times out). To do. That is, the BRQ signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops the output of the BRDY signal when the BRQ signal is turned off. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off.

  When the CPU 103 finishes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the transmission of the connection confirmation command is restarted. At this time, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the PRDY signal in the ON state.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 causes the payout control board 21TM037 to output the BRDY signal based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 resumes receiving the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the ON state based on the card. The EXS signal for the unit 21TM050 is turned on, and the subsequent ball lending payout control is executed.

  In addition, during the game (the state in which the timer interrupt process for the game control can be executed), the configuration that can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by the operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is adopted. Even in this case, the fourth ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-30 can be applied. In addition, the PRDY signal can be output (ON state) regardless of whether the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (ON state or OFF state). Even when such a configuration is adopted, the fourth ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-30 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the EXS signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation command is not received from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed while the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled.

  Further, in FIG. 9-30, when a predetermined time elapses while the EXS signal is in the OFF state after the BRQ signal is in the ON state (when the timer set to a predetermined value times out), the card unit 21TM050 Shows an example of returning the BRQ signal to the OFF state and further returning the BRDY signal to the OFF state, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the EXS signal remains in the OFF state after the BRQ signal is turned on. The BRQ signal may be kept in the ON state and the BRDY signal may be kept in the ON state even after a lapse of a predetermined time. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 restarts the reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 (the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends), and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal. The EXS signal may be turned on based on the fact that both are on. Here, when the EXS signal is turned on, (1) the ball lending switch 21TM062 is not operated again, the BRQ signal is turned off, and the ball lending is automatically executed (that is, the setting change mode or When the setting confirmation mode ends, the ball lending processing according to the ball lending operation received within the period of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is executed). When the switch 21TM062 is operated again, the BRQ signal may be turned off and the ball lending may be executed.

(The method of not executing the ball lending restriction in the setting change mode)
Next, a method of not executing the ball lending restriction in the setting change mode will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the example shown in FIG. 9-31, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. I shall. That is, unlike the example shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on during the setting change mode. Shall be. Further, unlike the example shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state at the timing before being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, and the ON state is maintained during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

  FIG. 9-31 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the communication processing performed between control microcomputer 21TM370) and card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main substrate 11 to the payout control substrate 21TM037 is turned on, the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIG. 9-31, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 continues to transmit the connection confirmation command even during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As described above, the connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication state with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal based on that the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state and that the connection confirmation command is received. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is kept in the ON state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, in a state where it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, in the game control microcomputer 100 and When the CPU 103 is in the state of being electrically connected) and receiving the connection confirmation command, the PRDY signal is output regardless of whether the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Is turned on.

  If the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and a ball lending switch signal is input while the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 Based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state, the BRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control board 21TM037 determines that the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are all in the ON state and that the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 is received based on the connection confirmation command. When the falling (OFF) of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050 is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of game media to the player.

  In this way, even during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 continuously transmits the connection confirmation command, so that the connection confirmation command is continuously received. On the side of the control microcomputer 21TM370, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned on. In this way, it is possible to execute the payout control of the game medium by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 even during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting check mode is controlled, and the setting change mode or the setting check mode is set. It is possible to reduce the control load for not executing the payout control during the controlled period. In addition, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the communication function between the card unit 21TM050 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be inspected and the workability can be improved. it can.

  The CPU 103 continues to send the connection confirmation command even after the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. Based on continuing to receive the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the ON state of the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  In addition, when the payout of the predetermined number of game media is completed and the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control board 21TM037 stops the output of the EXS signal. . That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops the output of the BRDY signal based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off. As described above, the EXS signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and the BRDY signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state accordingly. In addition, when the payout of the predetermined number of game media ends and the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 stops after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the payout control board 21TM037 stops the output of the EXS signal. That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops the output of the BRDY signal based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state. As described above, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the EXS signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state, and the BRDY signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state accordingly.

(How to restart ball lending after the setting change mode ends)
Next, regarding the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted because the power is cut off while the ball lending is being executed and the power supply is thereafter turned on to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, refer to FIG. It will be specifically described by using. In the example shown in FIG. 9-32, based on the fact that the power supply is cut off while the game medium is being paid out, the game medium is stopped from being paid out, and after the power is turned on, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and the setting is performed. After the completion of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the discontinued payout is restarted.

  FIG. 9-32 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. FIG. 21 is a timing chart for explaining a communication process performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

  When power is cut off during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. It That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the unpaid amount data is stored in the unpaid amount storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  This unpaid number is updated based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the unpaid number is a payout number count switch from the predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, the payout number specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25). It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by the 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state, so the CPU 103 changes the setting. The connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is OFF while the mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed.

  While the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state, and therefore the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal but turns it off even if the VL signal is in the on state, that is, even if it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 is based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, and the payout control is performed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state, instead of keeping it in the ON state, based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is OFF, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all OFF, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the process is being executed, the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  Based on the fact that when the CPU 103 finishes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  Then, the power supply is restarted, and the payout control is performed based on that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode controlled when the power is turned on is ended (the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state and the PRDY signal is in the ON state). Microcomputer 21TM370 drives the payout motor 21TM289 based on the contents of the unpaid amount storage buffer stored in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the unpaid amount data becomes 0 one by one. The payout operation is performed. As a result, the payout of the game medium that has been interrupted due to the power-off and the subsequent transition to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. In this way, when the power supply is cut off while the ball lending is being executed and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, even if the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is subsequently restored, the setting is changed. After the change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, it is possible to restart the suspended payout of the game medium and complete the ball lending.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 9-32, the payout process is interrupted due to the power interruption during the payout process, and is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is restored. The example in which the suspended payout process is restarted after the end of the above is shown. The power cut may be generated, or the power switch 21TM055 may be turned off at the end of business at the game arcade. Not only when the power is cut off, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 during the payout process, or the glass door frame 3a is opened. In response to the detection of the state, the payout process being executed is interrupted, and then the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and the interrupted payout process is terminated after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. It may be restarted.

(How to forcibly terminate ball lending due to power interruption)
Next, regarding the processing in the case where the payout is forcibly terminated (stopped) when the power is cut off while the ball lending is being executed, and the payout is not restarted after the power is restored, specifically, referring to FIG. 9-33. explain. In the example shown in FIG. 9-33, when the power is cut off while the game medium is being paid out, the current payout is stopped, and when the power is restored and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, The payout is not restarted, and the payout is not restarted even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends.

  FIG. 9-33 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. FIG. 21 is a timing chart for explaining a communication process performed between the computer microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

  When power is cut off during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. It That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 and forcibly ends (stops) the payout of the game medium based on the fact that the EXS signal is turned off. At this time, the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not store the unpaid number data (or the unpaid number storage buffer itself is not provided). Therefore, as shown below, after the power is restored, the payout of the game media corresponding to the unpaid number is not executed.

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state, so the CPU 103 changes the setting. The connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is OFF while the mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed.

  After that, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal but turns it off even if the VL signal is in the on state, that is, even if it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 is based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, and the payout control is performed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state, instead of keeping it in the ON state, based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is OFF, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all OFF, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the process is being executed, the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  Based on the fact that when the CPU 103 finishes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible. Since the data of the unpaid amount is not backed up, the predetermined amount to be paid out in the ball lending process that was executed before the power failure occurred (before the power supply was restored to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). Of the number of game media (that is, the number of payouts designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the number of unpaid amounts not paid out due to the suspension (compulsory termination) of the payout is paid out. Not done In this way, if the power is cut off during the execution of the ball lending, the payout is forcibly terminated (stopped), and then, when the power is restored, the setting change mode or the setting change mode or the setting change mode is controlled. By not executing the payout for the unpaid number after completion of the confirmation mode, the control for backing up the data of the unpaid number and restarting the payout becomes unnecessary, and the ball lending process can be simplified.

  In the example shown in FIG. 9-33, when the power is cut off during payout, the payout in progress is forcibly terminated (stopped) by not backing up the unpaid number of data. Not limited to such a form, as in the example shown in FIG. 9-32, when the power is cut off, the unpaid number of data is backed up and the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are restored after the power is restored. On condition that it is not controlled by any of them, the payout of the game media corresponding to the unpaid quantity is executed based on the backed up data of the unpaid quantity (restarting the payout based on the backup data), while the power is restored. When it is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout of the game media corresponding to the unpaid number is not executed (the payout based on the backup data is not restarted), and the setting change is made. After mode or setting confirmation mode end also not perform the payout of unpaid coin number corresponding to the game medium may be so.

  In addition, during the game (the state in which the timer interrupt process for the game control can be executed), the configuration that can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by the operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is adopted. Even in this case, the method of forcibly ending the ball lending that accompanies the shift to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-33 can be applied. In addition, the PRDY signal can be output (ON state) regardless of whether the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (ON state or OFF state). Even if such a configuration is adopted, the method of forcibly ending the ball lending that accompanies the shift to the setting change mode illustrated in FIG. 9-33 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is not received from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the payout (ball lending) from being executed during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

(Prize ball payout control)
FIG. 9-34 is a timing chart showing signal transmission / reception between the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIG. 9-34, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal is transmitted again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the reception time. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a winning when the connection confirmation communication process is not being executed (from receiving the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal until transmitting the connection confirmation command as the award ball request signal), the game is played. The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of award balls in the award ball request signal, and transmits the award ball number command as the set award ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receipt of the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command, and the prize balls are paid out (the prize ball payout operation). When finished, a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the award ball end command as the reception ACK signal, it transmits a connection confirmation command as the award ball request signal after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the time of reception.

  Although not shown, there is a winning during the execution of the communication process for connection confirmation (from the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the reception of the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal). In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of award balls in the award ball request signal, and sends the award ball number command as the set award ball request signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. After receiving the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the connection OK command is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receipt of the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command, and the prize balls are paid out (the prize ball payout operation). When finished, a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. During the payout of prize balls (prize ball payout operation), a prize ball preparing command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

(Invalid winning during setting change mode or setting confirmation mode)
FIG. 9-35 is a timing chart showing signal transmission / reception between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing.

  As described above, until the CPU 103 executes the interrupt permission (step S21TM1540) shown in FIG. 9-13, the first starting opening switch 22A, the second starting opening switch 22B, the first general winning opening switch to the fourth General winning a prize switch, and the switch process (step S21TM1620 shown in FIG. 9-14 shown in FIG. 9-14) for confirming the state (presence or absence of a detection signal) of each switch of the count switch 23 is not executed, and a special symbol process including a big hit determination process and the like. The processing (step S21TM1690 shown in FIG. 9-14) and the like are also not executed. Therefore, while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it does not detect the detection signal output from each switch and does not execute the big hit determination process or the like. That is, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the winning is invalid even if the game medium passes through each winning opening. Further, since the switch process is not executed, the detection of the game balls by the outlet switch 21TM070 is not executed, and the base total is not executed. In other words, until the interrupt permission is executed, it is not necessary to add up each item such as ratio, role ratio, and base. The processing load on the CPU 103 can be reduced because the processing is out of the aggregation period.

  While controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 does not execute the switch process and the special symbol process process, thereby invalidating the winning based on the fact that the game medium passes through each winning opening. And That is, the prize ball number command is not transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the big hit determination process and the like are not executed. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 on the basis of not receiving the prize ball number command from the game control microcomputer 100. That is, during the period in which the game is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control of the prize balls is not executed even if the game medium passes through each winning opening.

  When the CPU 103 finishes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the first starting opening switch 22A, the second starting opening switch 22B, the first general winning opening switch to the fourth general winning opening switch, and the count switch 23. It becomes possible to execute switch processing to check the state of each switch (presence or absence of a detection signal), it is possible to detect that the game medium has passed each winning opening, and it is possible to send the prize ball number command (and connection confirmation command). Become. In addition, it is possible to execute a special symbol process process including a big hit determination process.

  The gaming control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has received the connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal receives ACK. A connection OK command as a signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. At this time, when the game medium passes through one of the winning openings (when a winning occurs), the CPU 103 detects the winning by executing a switch process, and the game controlling microcomputer 100 outputs a winning ball request signal. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, which has transmitted the prize ball number command to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and has received the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, drives the payout motor 21TM289 and outputs a predetermined number (for example, three). Pay out the game media. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, which has paid out a predetermined number of game media, transmits a prize ball end command as a reception ACK signal.

  If the setting value is likely to be changed, the switch process is executed to extract the big hit determination random number, and the big hit determination is executed based on the big hit determination random number. When the set value before the change is a big hit, but the set value after the change (the set value after the confirmation) is not a big hit, the big hit judgment is executed based on the big hit judgment random number, or conversely before the change. However, there may be a case where the big hit determination is executed based on the big hit determination random number, which does not result in a big hit with the setting value of (1) but becomes a big hit with the changed setting value (setting value after confirmation). That is, in these cases, the relationship between the execution timing of the big hit determination and the set value becomes complicated, and there is a possibility that the player or the game hall is disadvantaged.

  In the present embodiment, when the setting change mode is controlled, by not performing the payout of the prize balls based on the fact that the game balls have passed through the respective winning openings, and by not executing the jackpot determination process, the jackpot determination is performed. The relationship between the execution timing and the set value is prevented from becoming complicated, and the disadvantage of the player or the game hall is prevented.

  Further, in the present embodiment, not only in the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed, but also in the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value is displayed but cannot be changed, the winning is similarly invalidated and the jackpot determination process is not executed. I have to. As for the setting confirmation mode, unlike the setting change mode, it can be controlled when the game control timer interrupt processing is being executed, not when the power is turned on, and the switch processing is performed during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. And, if the special symbol process processing can be executed, a completely different control from the setting change mode is required, and the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 increases.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, even in the setting confirmation mode, similarly to the setting change mode, it is possible to control only when the power is turned on, and the prize balls are not paid out based on the fact that the game balls have passed through the respective winning openings, and the big hit determination is made. By not executing the processing, the processing is shared and the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 is reduced.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the timer interrupt setting is performed after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed (step S21TM1500). . Therefore, because the game control timer interrupt process itself is not executed, the switch process and the special symbol process process in the game control timer interrupt process are not executed, and the period is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The prize in is invalidated. On the other hand, if the game is stopped due to a magnetic error, a radio wave error, a vibration error, etc., is a game stop error occurring during the period when the game control timer interrupt process is being executed, that is, during the game? Whether or not it is determined (step S21TM1615), if it is determined that a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615), subsequent switch processing (step S21TM1620) and special symbol process processing (step) in the same interrupt processing Since S21TM1690) is not executed, the winning is invalidated. In this way, the method of invalidating the winning (stopping the game) is different between when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled and when the game stop error occurs.

  By the way, by stopping the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the period when the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not transmit the connection OK command as the received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 100, as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, on the basis of not receiving the connection OK command during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the payout control of the game medium by not transmitting the prize ball number command. In this way, the game control microcomputer 100 does not cause the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to execute the payout control based on the fact that the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal are not output, It is possible to invalidate the winning.

  Incidentally, during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 may be operated so that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be controlled. . Even if such a configuration is adopted, the method shown in FIG. 9-35 can be applied, and the game control microcomputer 100 can be set based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is better not to execute the switch process and the special symbol process process.

  In addition, a configuration in which the game control microcomputer 100 can execute a switch process while being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (a configuration itself capable of detecting that the gaming medium has passed through each winning opening). Also good. When such a configuration is adopted, as described above, the payout control command is stopped by stopping the transmission of the prize ball number command and the connection confirmation command when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. The payout control is not executed by the microcomputer 21TM370, the winning is invalidated, and the special symbol process process is not executed. Then, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the transmission of the prize ball number command and the connection confirmation command is restarted in a state where the switch processing can be executed, and the special symbol process processing is executed.

(Payout restriction method during gaming machine frame / door frame open detection)
FIG. 9-36 is a timing chart showing signal transmission / reception between the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the gaming machine frame / door frame opening detection. As described above, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, during normal operation, a reception ACK transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Receive a connection OK command as a signal. At this time, when a clerk or the like in the game arcade opens the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door. The open state of the frame 3a is detected.

  In the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (and in the case where the glass door frame 3a and the upper plate are integrated, the glass door frame 3a is opened), the prize ball to be paid out Since the path through which the prize balls flow down is not physically connected to the upper plate that stores the flowing down prize balls, if the prize balls are paid out in this state, the game medium reaches the upper plate. It falls without doing it. Here, in a state where the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened, the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, and the big winning opening. When the passage of the game medium is detected at any of the winning openings, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a prize ball number command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 which detects the open state of the frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control of the game medium is not executed, and the award ball preparation command as the reception ACK signal is sent to the game control microcomputer 100. Send to. This award ball preparation command is until the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Transmission to the game control microcomputer 100 is continued until it is closed.

  In this way, during the period when the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, even if the gaming medium passes through each winning opening and a winning is detected, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the payout motor 21TM289. The prize ball payout control is not executed without driving. Then, a prize ball preparing command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the payout motor 21TM289. It is driven to execute payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls (the number designated by the prize ball number command) according to the winning within the period when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected. . Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, which has paid out a predetermined number of game media, transmits a prize ball end command as a reception ACK signal.

  When the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected during the payout of prize balls, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 interrupts the payout of the prize balls, and the prize balls are paid. Data of the unpaid number out of the number designated by the number command is stored in the backup area in the RAM. Then, a prize ball preparing command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the payout motor 21TM289. It is driven to execute the payout control of the game media corresponding to the unpaid number. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out the game medium transmits a prize ball end command as a reception ACK signal.

  In addition, during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the configuration that can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by operating the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is adopted Even in this case, the payout limiting method during the gaming machine frame / door frame open detection shown in FIG. 9-36 can be applied. In the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and are operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. It is impossible. Therefore, in order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened, and the gaming machine is controlled during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The machine frame 3 is normally open. During the period when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is restricted so that the payout of prize balls is not executed. As a result, the payout of prize balls during the period controlled in the setting change mode and the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode is restricted.

  Next, the control when the power is cut off in the setting change mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-37 (1) and (2).

  FIGS. 9-37 (1) and (2) show the patterns related to the power interruption, divided into different charts based on the difference in the situation at the time of the power interruption. The power-off pattern shown in Fig. 9-37 (1) shows the control when the power is cut off in the situation where "the set value is not confirmed" during "changing the set value". The set value at the time is the set value when the power was last turned on. In addition, the pattern related to the power cut shown in FIG. 9-37 (2) shows the control when the power cut occurs in the situation where the “set value is confirmed” is performed during “changing the set value”. The set value at power failure recovery is the set value when the power is cut off.

  That is, FIG. 9-37 (1) shows the setting when the power is cut off in the state where the lock switch 21TM051 is operated in the OFF state and the “set value determination” is not performed (the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state). FIG. 9-37 (2) shows the control related to the value, and the control related to the set value in the case where the power is cut off after the operation of “set value determination” in which the lock switch 21TM051 is operated in the OFF state is performed. Showing.

  Further, FIGS. 9-37 (1) and (2) show various situations in the setting change work from top to bottom according to the order of occurrence (see “Order” column and “Status” column). ). Further, in FIGS. 9-37 (1) and (2), the “lock switch” column shows the ON / OFF state of the lock switch 21TM051 in each situation (sequence 1 to 8). In the “setting value” column, setting value data (setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102) in each situation is shown. Further, in the column of "display of set value" in the drawing, the display contents (the set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display portion 21TM029A) in each situation are shown. There is.

  When the setting change operation is performed, as shown in the top row of the "status" column in Fig. 9-37 (1), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on (sequence 1), and As shown in the “Lock Switch” column, the lock switch 21TM051 at this time is in the ON state. Further, in FIG. 9-37 (1), the "set value" at the time of "power-on" of the order 1 is that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is "1" at this time. , "1".

  Further, the display content of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) shown in the “setting value display” column is blank (blank) at this stage because the power has just been turned on and the RAM 102 This indicates that the display of the set value is not started because the process of reading and displaying the set value stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM1150) is not yet performed.

  After the "power-on" status, the "setting change mode start" status (order 2) is entered. Then, in this "setting change mode start", as shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), the "lock switch" column is "ON" and the "set value" column is the RAM 102. The setting value is "1" based on the fact that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is not changed. It is “1” based on the fact that the setting value read out from and stored in the setting information temporary storage area is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display portion 21TM029A).

  Subsequently, when the status of "changing set values" (order 3) is reached, the "lock switch" column remains "ON", and the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is operated. As shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), since the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed, the "setting value" field remains "1", but the setting information is temporarily stored. By changing the setting value stored in the area from "1" to "2", the "setting value display" column (setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display section 21TM029A)) The selected new value is changed to "2".

  Further, when the setting value is being changed (sequence 4), the “lock switch” column remains “ON” and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, As shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), since the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed, the "setting value" field remains "1", but the setting information temporary storage area The setting value stored in is changed from "2" to "3" so that the "setting value display" column (setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) is selected. The new value is changed to "3".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), when the power is cut off during “changing the set value” (sequence 5), the operation for fixing the set value is not performed, and the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not operated. Since the process of overwriting the setting value stored in (the process of step S21TM1190 for confirming the setting value) has not been executed, the "setting value" field remains "1". That is, when the power is cut off, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 maintains the state of "1" when the power is turned on. Here, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is erased due to the power failure.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), when the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, the power is turned on (sequence 6). In the “setting change mode start” situation (order 7), the setting value (“1” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read and stored in the setting information temporary storage area. Since it is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A), the “setting value” column remains “1” and the “setting value display” column also becomes “1”. It should be noted that the same is true in the case of controlling in the setting confirmation mode instead of the setting change mode in the order 7.

  In this way, when the power is turned on, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the setting change operation is not completed (the lock switch 21TM051 is not switched to the OFF state), and when the power is cut off, the setting value of the RAM 102 is set. Since the setting value stored in the storage area has not been changed, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display portion 21TM029A) when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is The setting value is the value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power was turned on last time (before the power failure occurred). In this way, it is possible to appropriately determine the set value when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode.

  Next, the control in the case where the power failure occurs after the set value is determined will be described with reference to FIG. 9-37 (2). The description of the processing part that is common to the case where the power is cut off before the setting value is determined will be omitted. When the power is cut off after the set value is determined, the "set value determination" shown in order 5 is performed after the "setting value changing" shown in order 4. Here, immediately before the operation for confirming the set value is performed, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is “1”, and the set value ((1) stored in the setting information temporary storage area ( The display monitor 21TM029 (the set value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A) is in the state of "3". Then, in the setting change mode, the "lock switch" column is "OFF" based on turning off the lock switch 21TM051.

  That is, when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode (YES in step S21TM1180), the setting value “1” stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is stored in the setting information temporary storage area. The stored setting value (the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) is overwritten by "3", whereby the setting value is determined (step S21TM1190). As a result, “3” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102.

  When the power is cut off in this state (sequence 6), the process of overwriting the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (the process of step S21TM1190 for fixing the setting value) is executed, The “set value” column is “3”. That is, when the power is cut off, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed to "3", which is different from that when the power is turned on. Here, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is erased due to the power failure.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (2), when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state and the power is turned on (sequential 7), the situation of the “setting change mode start” thereafter ( In the order 8), the set value (“3” in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out and stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) is read. ), The “setting value” column becomes “3” and the “setting value display” column also becomes “3”. It should be noted that the same is true in the case of controlling in the setting confirmation mode instead of the setting change mode in the order 8.

  As described above, when the power is cut off without the lock switch 21TM051 being turned off during the control of the setting change mode, it means that the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off. The setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 have not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting values stored in the setting information temporary storage area are deleted. Therefore, if the store clerk at the game hall accidentally shifts the game machine to the setting change mode when the power is turned on and further performs the setting change operation (operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052). However, by turning off the power switch 21TM055 after that, the change of the set value can be stopped and the state before the shift to the setting change mode can be restored.

  The transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involves turning off the power supply (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and then turning on the power supply, so the state of the gaming machine is unstable. However, as shown in Fig. 9-37 (1), the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off and the power supply is not turned off. When a power failure occurs, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed after the power is turned on, so that the set value can be appropriately determined and the control related to the set value becomes unstable. Can be avoided, and appropriate control regarding the set value can be executed.

  FIG. 9-38 is a rendering device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the lock switch 21TM051 or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed). An example is shown in which (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, and game effect lamp 9) is used to notify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed.

  FIG. 9-38 (1) shows a state in which decorative symbols are variably displayed on the image display device 5 during the game. At this time, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing a game control timer interrupt process. When the main board 11 (CPU 103) detects that the lock switch 21TM051 is operated (switched from the OFF state to the ON state) during the game (for example, during the variable display of the special symbol) (game control) Timer interrupt processing for step S21TM1660), a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) (step S21TM1710 for game control timer interrupt processing). ), When it is detected that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM1660 of the game control timer interrupt process), the setting changeover switch operation indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated Command, production control board 12 And transmits to the effect control CPU 120) (step a game control timer interruption process S21TM1710). That is, the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted in order to notify that the operation for changing the set value has been performed.

  As shown in FIG. 9-38 (2), the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) receives the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command, and the setting change mode and It is possible to specify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed, even though the operation is not controlled in any of the setting confirmation modes, and to notify that effect. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes the abnormal operation warning notification displaying the characters "The operation of the lock switch has been detected." Also, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification displaying the character "Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." Is executed.

  In this example, the effect control CPU 120 receives an operation command of the lock switch and an operation command of the setting changeover switch, and then "detects the operation of the lock switch or the setting changeover switch" as the abnormal operation warning notification. Is displayed on the image display device 5. Since the abnormal operation warning notification has a higher display priority than the background image and the decorative pattern (the displayed layer is higher than the background image and the decorative pattern), as shown in FIG. 9-38 (2), Even during the variable display of the symbols, the clerk at the amusement hall, etc. does not control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, but the operation for changing the setting value is performed. It is possible to clearly understand and confirm whether or not fraud has occurred. It should be noted that the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a voice notifying that an operation for changing the set value has been detected (for example, a voice "operation of a lock switch or a setting switch has been detected"), and the game effect lamp 9 May be emitted in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a red blinking mode) to notify that the operation for changing the set value is detected.

  In the present embodiment, only when the power is turned on (before the game control timer interrupt process is executed), the configuration can be controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and normally, the setting value is changed or confirmed. The operation for operating (lock switch 21TM051 and clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052) is not performed within a period during which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed. Therefore, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are operated within the period during which the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is executed, or within the period when the variable display of the ordinary symbol is executed. If so, there is a possibility that the setting value is being changed illegally.

  In the present embodiment, when the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at a timing other than when the power is turned on or during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Informs that an operation for changing a set value and an operation for confirming the set value have been performed on the image display device 5, which is the largest display device of the pachinko gaming machine 1, to confirm the illegality. I try to suppress it.

  Further, as described above, when the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the gaming machine frame 3 is normally opened, so that the gaming machine frame / door frame is opened. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the sensor 21TM300, and the fact is notified. Further, as described above, the ball lending is suspended or stopped, and the prize ball payout is also suspended or stopped. However, with respect to the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at the predetermined position on the gaming island, the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at the position facing the predetermined position on the gaming island becomes open. Thereby, it is possible to see the back side surface of the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at the predetermined position from the position opposite to the predetermined position, and the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch ( It becomes possible to operate the setting changeover switch) 21TM052. That is, even when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the predetermined position does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, the lock switch 21TM051 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the predetermined position and In some cases, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is irrespective of whether or not the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. When an operation is performed, notification that the operation for changing the setting value and the operation for confirming the setting value has been performed strengthens the illegal suppression.

(Signal for setting change)
Next, various signals output from the information output terminal of the main board 11 will be specifically described. As shown in FIG. 9-39, the information output circuit 112 according to the present embodiment is provided with ten information output terminals from the first terminal to the tenth terminal, and outputs a signal corresponding to each information output terminal. To be done.

  In the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), a prize ball signal is output from the first terminal. The prize ball signal is a pulse-shaped signal that is output every time 10 prize balls are paid out, and has a pulse width of 0.1 second. A gaming machine frame / door frame opening signal is output from the second terminal. The gaming machine frame / door frame opening signal is turned on when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, and the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. It will be in the ON state even when there is.

  From the third terminal, the all symbol determination frequency signal is output. The all symbol determination frequency signal is output when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the display result is displayed and displayed (when confirmed), the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the display result is derived. It is a pulsed signal that is output when it is displayed (determined), and has a pulse width of 0.5 seconds. The all-start signal is output from the fourth terminal. The all-starting-port signal is a pulse-like signal that is output when a game ball is won at the first starting winning opening and is also output when a gaming ball is winning at the second starting winning opening. And the pulse width is 0.1 second.

  One signal for the big hit is output from the fifth terminal. The big hit 1 signal is turned on when the big hit game state is controlled. Two jackpot signals are output from the sixth terminal. The jackpot 2 signal is in the ON state when being controlled in the jackpot gaming state, and is also in the ON state when being controlled in the high base state. That is, a period in which one jackpot signal is in the OFF state and two jackpot signals are in the ON state can be specified as the high base state.

  A setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is a signal which is turned on during the period controlled by the setting change mode and is turned on during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode. Further, as described later, the setting change corresponding signal can be output in a pulse (special mode) after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the set value can be specified on the external device side by the number of pulses at that time. It is possible.

  An out signal is output from the eighth terminal. The out signal is a pulse-like signal that is output each time 10 out balls (game balls that have been launched into the game area and led to the discharge port) are detected by the discharge port switch 21TM070, and have a pulse width of 0. It is 1 second. A winning signal is output from the ninth terminal. The winning signal is generated each time a game ball wins in each winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, large winning opening, first general winning opening to fourth general winning opening) (corresponding to each winning opening It is a pulse-shaped signal that is output each time a prize is detected by the switch) and that is output each time 10 prize balls are paid out. The pulse width of the winning signal is 0.1 seconds.

  A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that is turned on for 30 seconds when the initialization process (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is executed when the power is turned on. Further, when a fraudulent activity is detected, it is turned on for 4 minutes. When the fraudulent activity is detected, for example, a case where an abnormal prize is generated is included, and each prize hole has an abnormal frequency (for example, a game ball is frequently played at a frequency of 15 times or more per 30 seconds in the first start prize hole). It is determined as an abnormal prize based on the fact that the game ball has won in the case of winning a prize). In addition, a case where a switch abnormality detection occurs is also included, and the period during which the switch corresponding to each winning opening is in the winning detection state is abnormal (for example, 10 times or more consecutive in the game control timer interrupt process). 1) When the starting port switch is in the ON state, etc.), it is determined that the switch abnormality is detected. Also, when abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor, based on the occurrence of a game stop target error, the ON state continues until the power is turned off, and when the abnormal magnetism is no longer detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is cleared), it remains ON for 4 minutes.

  Further, in the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), the security signal is turned on during the period controlled by the setting change mode, and is also turned on during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode. .

  As described above, since the security signal can be output from the tenth terminal and the setting change corresponding signal can be output from the seventh terminal, it is possible to notify the outside of the possibility that the misconduct has been performed, It is possible to notify the outside that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled (the processing related to the setting change is executed). Further, with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal output from the seventh terminal is once turned off, and then stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 from the same seventh terminal. Since the number of pulse-like setting change correspondence signals corresponding to the current set value is output, the set value can be notified to the outside.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (1), when the setting change mode is entered at power-on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, from the tenth terminal. Outputs a security signal. Then, based on the execution of the RAM clear, the security signal is kept in the ON state for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned OFF due to the end of the setting change mode.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (2), when the setting confirmation mode is entered at power-on, a setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the 10th terminal. Is output. Then, based on the fact that the RAM clear is not executed, the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are turned off at the same time with the end of the setting confirmation mode. Here, when the RAM clear is executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM1320 or NO in step S21TM1330), the example shown in FIG. 9-40 (1) Similarly, even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds.

  If the RAM clear is executed without switching to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the security signal remains on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on. Does not turn on.

  As described above, the security signal remains in the ON state during the period in which the security signal is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, even if the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and is configured not to execute the process based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, at least based on the input of the security signal. Thus, it is possible to recognize that the control may have been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  The setting change corresponding signal is turned off when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, but regarding the security signal, the parity is set in the setting change mode (or in the setting confirmation mode) based on the execution of the RAM clear. Even if the check result is not normal), it remains ON for 30 seconds. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on. Therefore, on the external device side to which the security signal is input, when the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to recognize that there is a possibility. On the other hand, if the security signal input period exceeds 30 seconds, it is possible to recognize that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may have been controlled, and the security signal input period reaches 30 seconds. If not, it can be recognized that the RAM clear may not have been executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode. In other words, if the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, it is possible that the RAM clear may have been executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. If the device can recognize and the security signal input period is less than 30 seconds, the management device can recognize that the control device may have been temporarily controlled in the setting confirmation mode, and input the security signal. If the period exceeds 30 seconds, the management device can recognize that the setting change mode may have been controlled. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish what control the game machine has executed on the outside by the output period of the security signal of the game machine.

  Therefore, even if the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and is configured not to execute the process based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, at least based on the input of the security signal. Thus, the possibility that the RAM clear has been executed and the possibility that the RAM has been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be distinguished and recognized.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (3), the security signal may not be output during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. In this configuration, the security signal is output during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, while the security signal is not output during the period in the setting confirmation mode, and the period during which the security signal is controlled in the setting change mode. Does not output the security signal and does not output the security signal even during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Specifically, if the setting confirmation mode is entered at power-on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, but the security signal is not output from the tenth terminal. Then, when the setting change corresponding signal is turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is kept off because the RAM clear is not executed. That is, when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is not output on condition that the RAM clear is not executed.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (5), the RAM clear is executed after the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on. If (YES in step S21TM1320, or NO in step S21TM1330), the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the end of the setting confirmation mode (OFF state of the setting change corresponding signal).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (4), the security signal may not be output during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled. That is, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, but the security signal is not output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the fact that the RAM clear is executed at the end of the setting change mode, even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds. In addition, in a configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, when the RAM clear is executed without shifting to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on. The security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on, but the setting change corresponding signal is not turned on.

  In this way, while the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled, the setting change corresponding signal is turned on while the security signal is turned off, and when the RAM clear is executed, the setting change mode or By turning on the security signal for 30 seconds after the setting confirmation mode ends (after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off), when one signal is on, the other signal is turned off. Become a relationship. With such a relationship, the signal output control is simplified (the output control is simplified because both signals are not in the ON state at the same time), and the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is clarified in the external device. It is possible to clearly recognize that the initialization process has been executed when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends.

  As shown in FIG. 9-40 (6), when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, the game is played from the second terminal. A machine frame / door frame opening signal is output, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the completion of detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 with the closing of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, Even after the machine frame / door frame opening signal is turned off, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds.

  Here, in the example of the pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), the setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal and the security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Since there is a restriction on the assignment of the signal, it may be difficult to assign the output terminal dedicated to the setting change corresponding signal. The example of pattern 2 shown in FIG. 9-39 (2) shows an example in which the setting change corresponding signal is also output from the tenth terminal to which the security signal is output.

  In the pattern 2, the first terminal to the sixth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the ninth terminal are the same as the signal allocation in the pattern 1. In pattern 2, unlike pattern 1, a high base signal is output from the seventh terminal. The high base signal is in the ON state when being controlled to the high base state. A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that is turned on for 30 seconds when the initialization process (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is executed when the power is turned on. Further, when a fraudulent activity is detected, it is turned on for 4 minutes. When the fraudulent activity is detected, for example, a case where an abnormal prize is generated is included, and each prize hole has an abnormal frequency (for example, a game ball is frequently played at a frequency of 15 times or more per 30 seconds in the first start prize hole). It is determined as an abnormal prize based on the fact that the game ball has won in the case of winning a prize). In addition, a case where a switch abnormality detection occurs is also included, and the period during which the switch corresponding to each winning opening is in the winning detection state is abnormal (for example, 10 times or more consecutive in the game control timer interrupt process). 1) When the starting port switch is in the ON state, etc.), it is determined that the switch abnormality is detected. Also, when abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor, based on the occurrence of a game stop target error, the ON state continues until the power is turned off, and when the abnormal magnetism is no longer detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is cleared), it remains ON for 4 minutes.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 9-39 (2), the setting change corresponding signal is output from the tenth terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is a signal which is turned on during the period controlled by the setting change mode and is turned on during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode. Further, as described later, the setting change corresponding signal can be output in a pulse (special mode) after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the set value can be specified on the external device side by the number of pulses at that time. It is possible. Therefore, the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal are output from the tenth terminal. That is, the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal are output from the common terminal.

  As described above, since the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal can be output from the tenth terminal, it is possible to notify the outside of the possibility that an illegal act has been performed and an output terminal dedicated to the setting change corresponding signal is provided. Without this, it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (that a process related to the setting change may have been executed). Further, with the completion of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal output from the tenth terminal is temporarily turned off (when the RAM clear is executed, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is changed). After 30 seconds from the end, the signal output from the tenth terminal is turned off.) After that, from the same tenth terminal, the number of pulse-shaped signals corresponding to the current set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed. Since the setting change corresponding signal is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside. Then, since the setting change corresponding signal is transmitted to the management device together with the game machine number (unit number) via the relay device provided in the gaming machine island, the setting value based on the unit number and the setting change correspondence signal is set in the management device. By correlating and displaying the set value determined in advance with each other, it is possible to perform processing for displaying in a comparable manner. As a result, the actual setting values of a plurality of gaming machines can be easily managed by the administrator of the game shop via the management device, and the setting values that the administrator has decided in advance and the settings changed in the setting change work The administrator can understand the inconsistency with the value. When such inconsistency occurs, it is possible to optimize the management related to the settings in a plurality of gaming machines in the gaming store by confirming the settings of the gaming machine or performing the setting change work again. it can.

  As described above, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off with the end of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, but thereafter, it corresponds to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. It is output in a special manner. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-41, as the special mode setting change corresponding signal, a number of pulses corresponding to the set value are output. In this example, the same number of pulses as the number of set values is output. The pulse width is, for example, 0.1 seconds, and for example, when the set value is 3, pulses having a width of 0.1 seconds are output three times at predetermined intervals (for example, 0.5 second intervals). This makes it possible to easily specify the setting value of each gaming machine in an external device such as a hall computer.

  As shown in FIG. 9-42 (1), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on as the setting change mode is controlled when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the setting change mode has ended without changing the set value. Although the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off with the end of the setting change mode, the setting change corresponding signal of the special mode is based on that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is 1. 1 pulse is output as.

  In this way, it is possible to notify the outside whether or not the setting change mode is controlled by the setting change corresponding signal, and the set value at the end of the setting change mode (when the setting value is changed, (Setting value after change) can be notified to the outside, and a signal notifying whether the setting change mode is controlled and a signal notifying the setting value are output from the common information output terminal. Is possible.

  Further, in the present embodiment, not only when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode have ended, but at a predetermined predetermined timing, a number of pulses corresponding to the set value are output as a special mode setting change corresponding signal. It Specifically, events related to the gaming state, such as being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, ending the jackpot gaming state, ending the high base state, and increasing the number of paid award balls by 1000. Or an event related to the gaming machine error such as detecting the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a, or detecting a magnetic abnormality. When it occurs), a special mode setting change corresponding signal corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is output. In the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (1), one pulse is output as the special mode setting change corresponding signal when the big hit occurs.

  As a result, it is possible to secure an opportunity for the external device to grasp the set value of each gaming machine. For example, the external device may not be properly input with the setting change corresponding signal at the end of the setting change mode. Even when the setting value cannot be specified on the side, it becomes possible to specify the setting value at a predetermined timing thereafter, and it is possible to strengthen the prevention of fraud in which the setting value is changed by an inappropriate method.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (2), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on as the setting change mode is controlled when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, it is assumed that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed from 1 to 3 as a result of the setting value being changed in the setting change mode. In this case, when the setting change mode ends, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 becomes 3 and the setting change corresponding signal is set. Three pulses are output as a signal. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (2), three pulses are output as the special mode setting change corresponding signal triggered by the occurrence of the big hit.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (1), the operation for changing the setting value (the operation of the setting changeover switch 21TM052) was not performed while the setting value was controlled, and the setting value was not changed. In the case and as shown in FIG. 9-41 (2), the operation of changing the setting value (operation of the setting changeover switch 21TM052) was performed while the setting change mode was controlled, and the setting value was changed. In either case, after the setting change mode ends, the number of pulse-like setting change correspondence signals corresponding to the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 are output. There is. In this way, when the setting change mode is controlled, the common signal output process is executed at the end of the setting change mode regardless of whether the setting change operation or the setting value is actually changed. The signal output processing can be simplified.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (3), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on as the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, in the setting confirmation mode, since the setting value is not changed, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 remains 1, which is not changed. In this case, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode, and the setting change corresponding signal is set to 1 in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102. 1 pulse is output. In the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (3), one pulse is output as the special mode setting change corresponding signal triggered by the occurrence of the big hit.

  In this way, it is possible to notify the outside of whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled by the setting change corresponding signal, and the setting value notified in the setting confirmation mode (the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is stored when the power is turned on). The setting value stored in the area, which is the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, can be notified to the outside, and a signal for notifying whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled and the setting value It is possible to output the signal for notifying that from the common information output terminal.

  In the information terminal allocation pattern 2 shown in FIG. 9-39 (2), when the RAM clear is executed at the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the signal output from the tenth terminal is After 30 seconds have passed from the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the state is turned off, and thereafter, from the same tenth terminal, the number of pulses (special mode) corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 ) Setting change corresponding signal is output.

(Modification of game control main processing)
Next, another mode relating to the game control main processing of FIGS. 9-11 to 9-13 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-43 and 9-44. FIGS. 9-11 to 9-13 show an example in which the initialization process (RAM clear) is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, but the present invention is not limited to this mode, and FIG. As shown in FIG. 43 and FIG. 9-44, it is possible to shift to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the initialization processing (RAM clear) is executed.

  In the game control main processing shown in FIG. 9-11, the CPU 103 sets the RAM 102 to the accessible state (step S21TM1060), moves to step S21TM2110 in FIG. 9-43, and clears input through the input port. The state of the output signal (clear signal) of the switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is confirmed (step S21TM2110).

  When the ON state is detected in the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM2110), the CPU 103 causes the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 to turn on when the power is turned on. A RAM clear flag indicating that the operation has been performed is set (step S21TM2210), and initialization processing is executed (step S21TM2220). A series of processing (processing shown in steps S21TM2220 to S21TM2270) accompanying the initialization processing is the same as the processing shown in steps S21TM1410 to S21TM1460 shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the OFF state is detected in the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 in step S21TM2110 (NO in step S21TM2110), the CPU 103 executes the processing of step S21TM2120 and thereafter. To do. The processing shown in steps S21TM2120 to S2170 is the same as the processing shown in steps S21TM1320 to S21TM1370 shown in FIG.

  Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON after transmitting the backup command at the time of power-off recovery in step S21TM2170 or after transmitting the initialization command at power-on in step S21TM2270. (Step S21TM2310 of FIG. 9-44). When the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM2310; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM2550. When the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM2310; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on. It is confirmed (step S21TM2320).

  When the RAM clear flag is set, that is, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 sets the setting value changeable mode. (Step S21TM2330 to step S21TM2400). That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The processing state is controlled to the setting change mode based on the fact that The processing shown in steps S21TM2330 to S21TM2400 related to the setting change mode is the same as the processing shown in steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200 in FIG. After executing the process of step S21TM2400, the set RAM clear flag is erased (step S21TM2410), and the process proceeds to step S21TM2550.

  If the RAM clear flag is not set, that is, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 can confirm the setting value. The mode is shifted to (step S21TM2510 to step S21TM2540). That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, but does not meet the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Based on this, the processing state is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. The processing shown in steps S21TM2510 to S21TM2540 related to the setting confirmation mode is the same as the processing shown in steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240 in FIG. Then, in step S21TM2540, when it is confirmed that lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (YES in step S21TM2540), the process proceeds to step S21TM2550.

  Here, if the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on, it is temporarily determined as NO in step S21TM2120 or step S21TM2130 in FIG. Even if the processing (1) is executed, the RAM clear flag is not set. As a result, NO is determined in step S21TM2320, and the mode is not shifted to the setting change mode. In this way, even when the initialization process (initialization of the game state by RAM clear) is executed, when the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON at the time of power-on is not satisfied, Are not controlled by the setting change mode.

  After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, or when the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state when the power is turned on, the series of processes relating to step S21TM2550 to step S21TM2620 is the same as step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. 9-13. Since it is the same as the series of processes shown in step S21TM1540, description thereof will be omitted.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-43 and 9-44, when the setting change mode is controlled, the CPU 103 transmits the initialization command at power-on (step S21TM2270) and then the setting change mode command (step S21TM2340). ) Is transmitted, and a setting command is transmitted (step S21TM2550). When the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the CPU 103 transmits the setting confirmation mode command after transmitting the backup command at power-off recovery or the initialization command at power-on (step S21TM2170 or step S21TM2270). S21TM2520) and a setting command (step S21TM2550). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting command after receiving the setting change mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp. It is possible to notify the end of the setting change mode by a production device such as 9. Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control can specify the end of the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command and then the setting confirmation mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp. It is possible to notify the end of the setting confirmation mode by a production device such as 9. According to such a configuration, by receiving the setting command without providing a dedicated command (setting change mode end command or setting confirmation mode end command) for designating that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode has ended Since the effect control CPU 120 side can specify that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended, the number of commands can be suppressed. That is, the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 can be reduced, and the capacity for storing the number of commands can be suppressed.

(Other modified examples of the characteristic part 21TM)
In the above embodiment, an example in which the switch for changing the set value is common to the clear switch for initializing the game machine (RAM clear) has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the set value is not limited thereto. The switch for changing is provided on the main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100 can detect the operation), and is different from the clear switch for initializing the game machine (RAM clear). May be With such a configuration, the position of the switch for switching the setting value and the position of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display portion 21TM029A), as compared with the case where the switch for switching the setting value is provided on the power supply board. Therefore, when changing the set value, it becomes easy to confirm the set value and the switching operation according to the confirmation of the set value, and the workability can be improved.

  Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the setting value is displayed in the partial display area (first display portion 21TM029A) of the display monitor 21TM029 in which the game information such as the aggregated base is displayed has been shown. The display device is not limited to such a form, and is a display device different from the display monitor 21TM029 for displaying the totalized game state, for example, a dedicated display device for displaying a set value, and is provided on the main board 11. The set value may be displayed on a 7-segment display or the like. According to such a configuration, since the aggregated game information and the set value can be grasped more clearly individually, the work of changing the set value according to the aggregated game information is facilitated. Therefore, the workability can be improved.

  Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a clear switch for initializing the game machine (RAM clear) is provided but a switch for changing the set value is not provided. In such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 automatically changes the setting values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display portion 21TM029A) in order while being controlled in the setting change mode (for example, It is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display section 21TM029A) when the lock switch 21TM051 is changed from the ON state to the OFF state in the order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6). Stored setting values (setting values stored in the setting information temporary storage area) are stored in the setting value storage area (setting values stored in the setting value storage area are stored in the setting information temporary storage area). The set value may be confirmed by overwriting the set value). The clerk at the game arcade displayed the setting value to be confirmed by switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state at the timing when the set value to be confirmed is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A). The set value can be confirmed as the set value of the game machine.

  In the above embodiment, the gaming machine is an example of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media to the upper plate or the lower plate based on the occurrence of a prize, but is not limited to such a form. It may be an enclosed game machine in which a game medium is enclosed in a game machine and points are given based on the occurrence of a prize. In this enclosed game machine, the information regarding the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be included in the information periodically transmitted from the main board 11 to the card unit 21TM050 via the payout control board 21TM037, For example, it is controlled to the setting change mode, it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, it is within the period controlled to the setting change mode, it is within the period controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the set value It may include information indicating that an operation for changing the setting has been performed, that the setting change mode has ended, that the setting confirmation mode has ended, and the like. Further, the information output circuit 112 may transmit these pieces of information to a management device such as a hall computer, and the hall computer may be able to specify that each gaming machine is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. ..

  In the above embodiment, the image display device 5 or the like connected to the effect control board 12 is in the period of being controlled in the setting change mode, being in the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, or the like. However, the game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a form, but the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device are controlled based on being controlled in the setting change mode. The symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20, and the like may notify that the setting change mode is controlled (for example, the 7-segment display is caused to emit light in the first notification mode), and the setting confirmation mode. On the basis of being controlled to, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, etc. are controlled to the setting confirmation mode. Notification (for example, emit light to a different second notification manner from the first notification manner the 7-segment display) may be. Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an indicator (round number indicator) for displaying the number of rounds in the big hit game, and for instructing the player to launch a game ball in a specific area of the game area (for example, the right game area). If a display device (right-handed display device) or the like is provided to indicate that the display device is in the process of setting change mode, the display of the process is in the setting confirmation mode. Alternatively, the light may be emitted in any of the modes.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the security signal is turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and then the RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the security is set. The example has been shown in which the security signal is continuously turned on for 30 seconds after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended without the signal being turned off. Alternatively, when the security signal is turned on when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and then the RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. Accordingly, the security signal is turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then the security Utility signal specified period (e.g., 30 seconds) may be turned ON. By using this type of signal output method, it is possible to clearly specify the period in which the device is being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in an external device such as a hall computer, and it is clear that the RAM clear has been executed. Can be specified.

  Regarding the expectation suggestive effect shown in FIG. 8-5, each effect mode (black star) is set according to the set value (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) of the gaming machine and the jackpot expectation. The number of selections) may be changed. For example, even if the jackpot expectation is low, if the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high (for example, 5 or 6), the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is low (for example, (1 or 2), the expectation suggestion effect in which the number of black stars is 3 or more may be executed at a higher rate. With such an effect configuration, even when the display result is lost, the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 is high because the expectation suggesting effect with the number of black stars of 3 or more is executed. Can be expected from the player, and the player can be made to pay attention to the effect mode (the number of black stars) when the expectation suggestion effect is executed. In addition, even if the reach has a low jackpot expectation level, the expectation suggestion effect with a large number of black stars (for example, 3 or more) is accordingly executed, so that the player can play the pachinko game machine 1 concerned. Since the set value can be expected to be high, the interest can be improved even when the jackpot expectation is low.

  In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the game is played. When a combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, big The present invention can be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus). With such slot machines, the percentage of bonuses that are established varies depending on the set value, and it is possible to change the set value by controlling the slot machine in the setting change mode. It can be confirmed.

[Details and Other Forms of Characteristic Part 21TM]
Next, details and other forms of the above-mentioned characteristic portion 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a gaming machine frame. The gaming machine frame includes a gaming machine frame 3, a glass door frame 3a, and an outer frame (not shown). In addition, the gaming machine frame is provided with a hinge mechanism portion (not shown) on one end side in the left-right direction (for example, the left side when viewed from the player), and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are fulcrum points respectively. The other end in the left-right direction (for example, the right side when viewed from the player) is rotatably connected in a direction away from the outer frame. By rotating the glass door frame 3a like a door using the hinge mechanism as a fulcrum, the inner portion of the outer frame including the game area of the game board 2 can be opened. A lock mechanism for fixing the other end side of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a to the outer frame is provided on the other end side (for example, the right side when viewed from the player).

  The outer frame is made of metal and is a frame body that is an outer shell of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is a frame body made of synthetic resin to which the gaming board 2 is attached, and has a substantially rectangular frame shape having a center penetrating when viewed from the front. The game board 2 is attached to the game machine frame 3 from the front. The game board 2 attached to the gaming machine frame 3 is locked by a fixing device so as not to come off from the gaming machine frame 3. The gaming machine frame 3 is a frame body in which the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, and the like are arranged. The glass door frame 3a is provided with a glass plate (corresponding to a window portion) as a transparent window that protects the game board surface and allows the game area on the front surface of the game board 2 to be visually recognized.

  When a store clerk at the game arcade performs maintenance of the game board surface (for example, a measure to eliminate a ball clogging, etc.), the glass door frame 3a is hinged from the closed state in which the other end side is fixed (locked) to the outer frame. It is necessary to open the other end side away from the outer frame by rotating the mechanism part (one end side) as a fulcrum toward the front side like a door. In order to operate the power switch 21TM055, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the display changeover switch 21TM030, etc., which are arranged on the back side of the game board 2, in order to visually recognize the display monitor 21TM029. By rotating the gaming machine frame 3 from the closed state in which the other end side is fixed (locked) to the outer frame to the front side like a door with the hinge mechanism section (one end side) as a fulcrum, It is necessary to open the other end side away from the outer frame.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can specify that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the opened state. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, a detection signal capable of specifying that the glass door frame 3a is in the open state is output to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. On the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be distinguished and recognized.

(Process at power-on)
10-1 and 10-2 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed in the game control microcomputer 100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, and FIGS. 9-11 to 9-13, and This is processing corresponding to the processing shown in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-43 to 9-44. However, among the processes shown in FIGS. 9-11 and the like, some of the processes (for example, the processes shown in FIGS. 9-11) are omitted from the drawing.

  As shown in FIG. 10-1, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM3010). This processing is similar to the processing shown in step S21TM1330 of FIG. 9-13 and step S21TM2130 of FIG. 9-43, and a parity check is performed as a data check.

  If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting change flag is set (step S21TM3020). The setting change flag is set when the process proceeds to the setting change / confirmation process described later (step S21TM3510), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM3710).

  If the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM3020), the CPU 103 causes the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 to match a regular value, for example, any one of 1 to 6. It is confirmed whether or not (step S21TM3030). Here, when the pachinko game machine 1 is shipped from the game machine maker (before being installed in the game hall), a value (for example, 0) different from the regular value is stored in the set value storage area. There is a case. If the data in the set value storage area is corrupted, it may not be a regular value. If the set value is a regular value (YES in step S21TM3030), it is confirmed whether or not the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM3040).

  If the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3040), the CPU 103 clears the area excluding the setting value storage area and sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM3050). In the RAM clear processing in step S21TM3050, the data (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stored, which is stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102, is cleared and the initial value is set. However, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clearing process. Further, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the serial ratio, the winning combination, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated for each set value. The value is not changed before the RAM clear process. Then, the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to notify that the game state has been initialized. The notification that the game state has been initialized may be performed before the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and as described above, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. It may be performed.

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that the initialization processing has been performed (step S21TM3055), and proceeds to step S21TM3060. The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the initialization process is performed based on the reception of the initialization command. When the production control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the production control device 120 such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 may notify that the game state or the like has been initialized. It is possible.

  On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3040), the CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command for restoration) as a command for restoration of power supply (step S21TM3045), The process moves to step S21TM3060. Based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of restoration), the effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the power supply has been restored based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply. When the production control CPU 120 receives the backup command, the production device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like performs recovery from power interruption based on the data when the power supply is stopped. It is possible to notify that.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM3060). Here, as described above, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening A detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected are output from the sensor 21TM300 to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, When recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, the game control microcomputer 100 is notified by notifying that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  The game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects to the game control microcomputer 100 a detection signal indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a are detected. When the detection signal indicating that is output (that is, when the gaming control microcomputer 100 includes the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300), the gaming control microcomputer 100 determines By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3060), it is confirmed whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM3070). . Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3070), the process proceeds to step S21TM3510 and subsequent processes related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 10-2. When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the set value can be confirmed and changed, and when the mode is changed to the setting check mode, the set value can be confirmed.

  That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), the power is not cut off during the setting change (NO in step S21TM3020), and the set value is a normal value (step S21TM3020). If the condition 3 is YES (YES in S21TM3030), the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM3060), and the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM3070), and / or the setting value is changed. It becomes possible to confirm, and the game machine frame 3 is closed (NO in step S21TM3060), or the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF (NO in step S21TM3070), and then shifts to the normal game processing. .

  In the present embodiment, although the change of the set value is not permitted, in order to make it possible to confirm the set value (setting confirmation mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, 2) Two conditions are required: the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. When the CPU 103 confirms that the conditions (1) and (2) are both satisfied by the determination processing in steps S21TM3060 and S21TM3070, the CPU 103 can confirm the setting value (setting confirmation). Mode). In addition to these conditions (1) and (2), further, (3) under the condition that it is determined in step S21TM3040 that the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES), As will be described later, it is possible to shift to a state in which the setting value can be changed (setting change mode).

  As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and must be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. I can't. Even if the gaming machine frame 3 is not open, the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is operated means that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 has an abnormality or is somehow illegal. There is a possibility that the setting value is being confirmed or changed by the means. In such a state, it is inappropriate to permit the confirmation or change of the set value. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in the confirmation mode. Also, the control is not performed in any of the setting change modes.

  In the present embodiment, as condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although controllable, it is not limited to such a form, and even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode It may not be controlled by any of the above.

  On the other hand, in step S21TM3060, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized (NO in step S21TM3060), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a When it is in the closed state, the game process is shifted to the normal game process. If it is confirmed in step S21TM3070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3070), the process proceeds to the normal game process. With the shift to the normal game processing, the processing corresponding to step S21TM1470 to step S21TM1540 shown in FIG. 9-13 or step S21TM2550 to step S21TM2620 shown in FIG. 9-44 becomes executable, and FIG. The game control timer interrupt processing shown can be executed (special symbol process processing can be executed).

  In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM3010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM3010), the CPU 103 determines that the set value stored in the set value storage area may be abnormal. The set value abnormality error command shown is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). Here, even if a regular value (1 to 6) is stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is damaged, step S21TM3110 is executed, The CPU 103 and the effect control CPU 120 recognize that the value stored in the set value storage area may be inappropriate.

  If it is confirmed in step S21TM3020 that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM3020), the CPU 103 transmits a setting value abnormality error command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). ).

  Further, in step S21TM3030, when the regular value (1 to 6) is not stored in the setting value storage area (NO in step S21TM3030), CPU 103 stores 0 in the setting value storage area (step S21TM3100). ), And transmits a setting value abnormality error command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). Even if the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM3010) in the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM3010), if the normal value (1 to 6) is not stored in the set value storage area, , 0 is set as the set value, and the set value error command is transmitted.

  Upon receipt of the setting value abnormality error command, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the setting value may be abnormal (for example, a message "setting value is abnormal" is displayed. Do). Further, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the setting value should be changed (for example, a message "please change the setting value" is displayed). Note that the speakers 8L and 8R may notify that there is a possibility that the set value is abnormal (for example, output a voice "The set value is abnormal."), And change the set value. You may make it notify that it is in a proper state (for example, output the voice "Please change the setting value.").

  When the CPU 103 transmits the setting value abnormality error command, it checks whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM3120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3120), it is confirmed whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM3130). ..

  If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3130), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM3140).

  If the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3140), the CPU 103 clears the area including the setting value storage area and sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM3150). In the RAM clear processing in step S21TM3150, the data (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stored, which is stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102, is cleared and the initial value is set. Is set, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is also cleared, and 0 is stored in the setting value storage area. On the other hand, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the continuous ratio, the winning combination, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each area for each set value is not cleared. The total value is not changed before the RAM clearing process. Then, the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to notify that the game state has been initialized.

  Then, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear (step S21TM3150), then transmits the initialization command (step S21TM3160), and the processing after step S21TM3510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. Move to. It should be noted that the backup command when power is restored (step S21TM3045) and the initialization command when power is turned on (step S21TM3055 or step S21TM3160) are commands that are transmitted only once when the power is turned on. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits these power-on commands, it can specify that the power-on commands have been transmitted, and set a command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is off. The command transmission flag may be cleared at the time of shifting to the normal game processing (step S21TM1470-). Then, only when the command transmission flag is not set, the backup command when power is restored (step S21TM3045) and the initialization command when power is turned on (step S21TM3055 or step S21TM3160) may be transmitted.

  On the other hand, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM3120 (NO in step S21TM3120), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a If it is in the closed state, the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200). If it is confirmed in step S21TM3130 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3130), the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200). If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3140), the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200).

  That is, when the result of the data check of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM3010), the power is cut off during the setting change (that is, the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, In the case where it is determined to be YES in step S21TM3020) and the setting value is not a regular value (NO in step S21TM3030), the game should not be played in this state, Before shifting to the normal game processing, it is necessary to set the set value in the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the area including the setting value storage area is cleared by RAM clear (step S21TM3150), and the mode is changed to the setting change mode.

  In the present embodiment, in order to change the setting value (setting change mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, (3) Three conditions that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state are required. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied by the determination processing of steps S21TM3120, S21TM3130, and S21TM3140, it is possible to change the setting value ( It is possible to switch to the setting change mode).

  If any one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value of the set value storage area can be set to a regular value. Without, it is not possible to shift to the normal game processing. Therefore, if NO is determined in any of the determination processes of step S21TM3120, step S21TM3130, and step S21TM3140, the power is temporarily cut off, and the next power-on (1) to (3) All of the conditions are satisfied and the mode is changed to the setting change mode to set the set value in the set value storage area to a regular value.

  When any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 transmits a command for notifying that the power should be turned off to the effect control CPU 120. It may be done. Then, the effect control CPU 120 that has received this command may display a message (for example, the characters “Please turn off the power”) urging the image display device 5 to turn off the power. . Further, the CPU 103, when one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, predetermines the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The light may be emitted in the power-off instruction mode to prompt the user to turn off the power.

  Next, processing related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIG. 10-2. In the processing of FIG. 10-2, the CPU 103 sets the setting change flag indicating that the setting value may be changed (step S21TM3510). Since the area in which the value of the setting change flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting change flag is retained even when the power is turned off.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM3520). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3520), it is confirmed whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (step S21TM3530). . If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM3530), the CPU 103 outputs the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal (step S21TM3540), and displays the setting value stored in the setting value storage area. It is displayed on the monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM3550).

  Further, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM3570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3570), that is, if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has not been executed, the CPU 103 specifies the setting confirmation mode. The command is transmitted (step S21TM3580), and the process proceeds to step S21TM3520. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

  On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM3570), that is, if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has been executed, the CPU 103 sets the setting change mode. A change mode command is transmitted (step S21TM3585), and it is confirmed whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM3590). Based on the reception of the setting change mode command, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled in the setting change mode.

  If the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM3590), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM3520. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM3590), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM3600), and proceeds to step S21TM3520. Transition.

  Here, the output of the security signal (step S21TM3540), the display of the current setting value (step S3550), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM3580) can be executed, but the transmission of the setting change mode command (step S21TM3585). ) And the setting value update (step S21TM3600) cannot be executed corresponds to the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed or the setting value cannot be changed. That is, in the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM3530), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3040, RAM clear flag). Remains 0).

  Further, the security signal can be output (step S21TM3540) and the current setting value can be displayed (step S3550), and the setting change mode command can be transmitted (step S21TM3585) and the setting value can be updated (step S21TM3600). This state corresponds to the setting change mode in which the set value can be confirmed and changed. That is, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM3530), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES is determined in step S21TM3040 or step S21TM3140, The RAM clear flag is set to 1).

  The setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits the setting confirmation mode command, it can specify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted, and set the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. The setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM3710). The setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting change mode control. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits the setting change mode command, it can specify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted, and set a setting change mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. The setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM3710). The setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

  If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state in step S21TM3530 (YES in step S21TM3530), the CPU 103 clears the setting change flag (step S21TM3710). Here, since the setting change flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting change flag is not set (NO) in the process of step S21TM3020 executed thereafter, so that it is possible to shift to the normal game process. Become.

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting command designating the setting value stored in the setting value storage area to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3720). As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Further, it is possible to suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value designated by the setting command. For example, the setting value can be suggested to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit game state ends different depending on the specified setting value.

  Next, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM3730) and confirms whether the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM3740).

  Here, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3740), the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), and power failure occurs during setting change. It is determined that there is not (NO in step S21TM3020), the set value is a regular value (YES in step S21TM3030), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (step S21TM3040). No), the RAM clear (step S21TM3050) is not executed. Therefore, the normal process at the time of power restoration may be executed, and both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. Things (Step S21TM3060 When the NO) has been confirmed, it may be shifted to the normal game processing.

  On the other hand, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM3740), it means that the RAM clear is executed in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150, and the lock switch 21TM051 is temporarily turned off. Before (YES in step S21TM3530), the regular set values (1 to 6) are not stored in the set value storage area (for example, in the setting change mode while the set value remains 0). If the operation for changing the set value is not performed), it is necessary to shift to the setting change mode and store the regular set values (1 to 6) in the set value storage area. Therefore, the CPU 103 shifts to the power-on process again and executes the processes of step S21TM3010 and subsequent steps.

  As described above, the clerk or the like in the game hall puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. In addition to being able to control, it is possible to initialize the game state and the like (execute the RAM clear of step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). Also, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, it is possible to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting confirmation mode, and also the gaming state and the like. Can be not initialized (NO in step S21TM3040 or step S21TM3140 and the RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 is not executed). In this way, the clerk at the game arcade can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the game state or the like. There is.

  In the control shown in FIG. 10-2, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off (NO in step S21TM3530) in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (NO in step S21TM3530), and the gaming machine frame 3 and When all the glass door frames 3a are closed, NO is determined in step S21TM3520, and the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a waits for the open state. At this time, the game control microcomputer 100 operates the lock switch 21TM051 to change the setting or confirm the setting, by instructing the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a to be opened. A command instructing to notify that the mode should be ended may be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Then, the effect control CPU 120 that has received these commands notifies the fact that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a should be opened by the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the like, and also the lock switch 21TM051. It is operated to notify that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode should be ended. For example, the image display device 5 may display a message "Open the game machine frame 3 and turn off the lock switch 21TM051 to end the setting change mode."

  Further, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended and the process is shifted to the normal game process, when both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, (1) lock switch 21TM051 In response to the operation of (is turned from the OFF state to the ON state), a lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120, and (2) the setting changeover switch ( In response to the operation of the clear switch) 21TM052 (from the OFF state to the ON state), the setting control switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120. Become.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 9-38 (2), the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) sets based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command. It is possible to specify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed, even though the operation is not controlled by either the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and notify that effect. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes the abnormal operation warning notification displaying the characters "The operation of the lock switch has been detected." Also, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification displaying the character "Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." Is executed. As a result, the clerk at the amusement arcade clearly understands that the operation for changing the set value has been performed even though the operation is not controlled in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and thus illegal It is possible to check whether or not

  Not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is operated after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the process moves to the normal game process, and The lock switch operation command and the setting change switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. Thus, during the period when the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not checked. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the game control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 10-3 is an explanatory diagram showing changes in set values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. When the setting change mode is controlled, in step S21TM3550, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed. At this time, if a value different from the normal value (0 in this example) is stored in the set value storage area, the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029 is displayed as shown in FIG. 10-3 (1). Is displayed with the letter "E". Therefore, the clerk at the game arcade operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (performs the setting change operation), knowing that at least the regular value is not stored in the set value storage area.

  Every time the clerk at the game arcade operates the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM3590), the set value stored in the set value storage area is updated (step S21TM3600). For the sake of explanation, this example shows an example in which the regular set value is in the range of 1 to 3, and in this case, the set value stored in the set value storage area is 0 for each setting change operation. The information is updated in the order of → 1 → 2 → 3 → 1, and accordingly, the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is updated in the order of E → 1 → 2 → 3 → 1.

  In this way, when the value stored in the set value storage area is not a regular value, as the information corresponding thereto, information (numerical letter E in this example) different from the number is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. Is displayed. This makes it possible to clearly understand that a value different from the normal value is stored in the setting value storage area, and prompt a setting change operation. If a value different from the normal value (0 in this example) is stored in the set value storage area, and if that value (0 in this example) is also displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, the manager of the game hall. May misunderstand that the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 corresponds to any of the regular values, and may turn off the lock switch 21TM051 without performing the setting change operation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a value different from the regular value is stored in the set value storage area, the display monitor 21TM029 displays information different from the numeral (the letter E in this example). By preventing such misunderstanding, the setting change operation is surely performed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (1), when a value different from the normal value (0 in this example) is initially stored in the setting value storage area when the setting change mode is controlled. , The character "E" is displayed on the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029. After that, if the setting change operation is performed even once and a regular value is stored in the setting value storage area, However, no matter how many times the setting change operation is performed, the set value is updated within the range of the regular set value during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled (until the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state). The set value storage area does not store a value different from the normal value (0 in this example), and the display monitor 21TM029 also stores information different from the normal value (character E in this example). ) Is never displayed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (2), when the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is a normal value when the setting change mode is controlled, step S21TM3550 Then, the regular set value (2 in this example) stored in the set value storage area is displayed. For the sake of description, this example shows an example in which the regular set value is in the range of 1 to 3, and in this case, the set value stored in the set value storage area is 2 for each setting change operation. The information is updated in the order of → 3 → 1 → 2 → 3, and accordingly, the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is updated in the order of 2 → 3 → 1 → 2 → 3.

  That is, when the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is initially a normal value when the setting changing mode is controlled, no matter how many times the setting changing operation is performed thereafter. During the period in which the setting change mode is controlled (until the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state), the set value is updated within the range of the set value, and the set value storage area does not show the set value. A different value (0 in this example) is not stored, and information (character E in this example) different from the normal value is not displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

  For example, when the gaming machine manufacturer ships the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installation in the gaming hall), it sets a value (0 in this example) different from the normal value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. Therefore, after that, on the game hall side, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, if the set value is not changed to the regular value through the setting change mode, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be played. become unable. Thereby, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, the setting change operation can be surely performed, and the set value can be fixed to a regular value.

  In addition, when the gaming machine maker sets the flag during setting change in advance before shipping the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installation in the gaming hall), the gaming hall then goes through the setting change mode. Unless the set value is changed to a regular value and the setting change mode is ended, the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be performed. Thereby, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, the setting change operation can be surely performed, and the set value can be fixed to a regular value.

(Restriction on ball lending based on detection of open state of game machine frame or glass door frame)
Next, a ball lending restriction method when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened and the glass door frame 3a is opened will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 10-4. FIG. 10-4 is a main substrate 11, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between a payout control board 21TM037 (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) and a card unit 21TM050.

  In the example of FIG. 10-4, based on the fact that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, Do not turn on the PRDY signal. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, in a state where it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, in the game control microcomputer. Even when the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, the CPU 103 does not turn on the PRDY signal but turns it off even if it is electrically connected to 100.

  As a result, while the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the PRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state, instead of keeping it in the ON state, based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, Since the EXS signal is OFF and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, the ball lending (payout of the game medium) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

  In this manner, the PRDY signal is turned on while the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is supposed not to. In this way, it is possible not to execute the payout control of the game medium by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Then, a clerk or the like in the game hall closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a in order to put the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a playable state, whereby the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is provided. The provided gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is in a state in which neither the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 nor the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. With the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a both closed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 causes the payout control board 21TM037 to output the BRDY signal based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both on, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and can be opened by a predetermined key operation. Since it is inoperable unless is opened, in order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened. That is, it is usual that the gaming machine frame 3 is opened during the period in which the game is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected includes the period in which the setting change mode is controlled and the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

  Here, since the transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode are accompanied by power-off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and power-on thereafter, the state of the gaming machine If the payout control corresponding to the ball lending process or the prize ball process is executed in such an unstable state, a proper amount of game media corresponding to the payout request can be paid out. May not be. In order to prevent the disadvantage of the player in such a situation, it is appropriate to limit the payout control in the gaming machine controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. However, in order for the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side to grasp the control status of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode on the game control microcomputer 100 side, a command and a determination process therefor are necessary, and the control is complicated. There is a problem that it will become.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected while the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is prevented from executing the ball lending process and the prize ball process during the period. As a result, the payout control is not executed regardless of whether the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting change mode or whether it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode. As a result, the ball lending process and the prize ball process during the period controlled in the setting change mode and the period checked in the setting confirmation mode are restricted without complicating the control on the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side. It With such a configuration, appropriate payout control is realized for the ball lending process and the prize ball process.

  In this way, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected during the period when the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. By limiting the payout control during the period, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of troubles due to the payout control, such as not being able to pay out an appropriate number of game media corresponding to the payout request, and the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is possible to smoothly proceed with maintenance work and the like of the game machine when the game machine is opened.

(Resuming ball lending after detection of open state)
Next, the payout is interrupted because the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened while the ball lending is being executed, and then the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. The processing in the case of being set will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 10-5. In the example shown in FIG. 10-5, based on the fact that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state while the game medium is being paid out. The payout of the game medium is interrupted, and the interrupted payout is restarted based on the fact that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is not in the open state (closed state).

  FIG. 10-5 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. FIG. 21 is a timing chart for explaining a communication process performed between the computer microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

  When the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. However, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  This unpaid number is updated based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the unpaid number is a payout number count switch from the predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, the payout number specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25). It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by the 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

  While the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs the PRDY signal. Is not turned on. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal but turns it off even if the VL signal is in the on state, that is, even if it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, while the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the card unit 21TM050 is based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. Thus, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, the BRDY signal is not output to the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state, instead of keeping it in the ON state, based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, during the period in which the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, any of the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal is detected. Is also in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, so that the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door When detecting that the open state of the frame 3a has ended), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  Then, based on the fact that the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state (the PRDY signal is in the ON state), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the content of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. As a result, the payout of the game medium, which has been interrupted by the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, is completed.

  Therefore, of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process that was executed before the power-off occurred (that is, the number of payouts designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the payout With respect to the unpaid number that has not been paid, the payout is executed, so that the disadvantage of the player can be avoided.

(Ball lending process when power is cut off (without changing to setting change mode))
Next, with reference to FIG. 10-6, regarding the processing in the case where the withdrawal is interrupted due to the occurrence of power interruption while the ball lending is being executed, and the control is not controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, To explain. In the example shown in FIG. 10-6, the payout of the game medium is interrupted based on that the power supply is cut off while the payout of the game medium is being executed, and the power supply is turned on to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Instead, after the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the suspended payout is restarted.

  FIG. 10-6 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. FIG. 21 is a timing chart for explaining a communication process performed between the computer microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

  When power is cut off during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. It That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the clerk at the game arcade turns the power switch 21TM055 on after the game machine frame 3 is opened. At this time, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is further operated. After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, the processing after step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. 10-1 is executed without being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the lock switch 21TM051 being in the OFF state when the power is turned on. Shall be. Here, until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) illustrated in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal because the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is off. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal but turns it off even if the VL signal is in the on state, that is, even if it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state, instead of keeping it in the ON state, based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, the period in which the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state ( During the period in which the PRDY signal is in the OFF state), the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines that the payout operation is to be performed. When possible, the PRDY signal is turned on. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a when the connection confirmation signal is turned on. If not, the PRDY signal is turned on.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected does not depend on whether the setting change mode is controlled, or whether the setting confirmation mode is controlled. No, the payout of the game medium is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By not maintaining the PRDY signal in the ON state but in the OFF state, the ball lending process is not executed. In this way, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  In addition, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the game clerk usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed and then opens the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Since it is in the closed state, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in the open state even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (from step S21TM1480). In such a case, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state based on the fact that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected. ..

  When the clerk at the game arcade closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal in the ON state, and the gaming machine frame / door frame is opened. Based on the fact that the sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal is turned on. Then, based on the PRDY signal being turned on, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the content of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the unpaid number of The payout operation is performed one by one until the data becomes 0. As a result, the supply of the game medium, which has been interrupted due to the occurrence of power failure and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a thereafter, is completed. In this way, when the power supply is cut off during the execution of the ball lending and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, it is possible that the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed when the power is restored thereafter. As a condition, it is possible to resume the suspended payout of the game medium and complete the ball lending.

(Ball lending process when power is cut off (moves to setting change mode))
FIG. 10-7 (1) is a block diagram showing a connection example of the RAM clear signal line in the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the main board 11, and the payout control board 21TM037. In the example shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is a game control micro. It is input to the I / O 105 of the computer 100 and the I / O 21TM372f of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. That is, the clerk of the game hall operates the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 to clear the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Both the RAM clearing and the RAM clearing are executed.

  Next, regarding the processing in the case where the withdrawal is interrupted due to the power interruption occurring while the ball lending is being executed and the power supply is restored to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, FIG. 10-7 (2) Will be specifically described. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), when the power is turned on, the clear switch 21TM052 is operated, so that the RAM clear signal is sent to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Shall be sent. In the example shown in FIG. 10-7 (2), when the power is cut off while the game medium is being paid out, the current payout is stopped, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored. Sometimes, the payout is restarted based on the fact that the RAM clear targeting the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed even after the payout is not restarted and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished. do not do.

  FIG. 10-7 (2) shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. It is a timing chart for explaining the communication processing performed between (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

  When power is cut off during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. It That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 and suspends the payout of the game medium based on the fact that the EXS signal is turned off. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the clerk at the game arcade turns the power switch 21TM055 on after the game machine frame 3 is opened. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (further to initialize the pachinko gaming machine 1), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and The clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. In order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, the lock switch 21TM051 is controlled to be in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  After that, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal but turns it off even if the VL signal is in the on state, that is, even if it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 is based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, and the payout control is performed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state, instead of keeping it in the ON state, based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is OFF, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all OFF, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing is being executed, the payout of the game medium is not executed even if the data of the unpaid number is not cleared.

  After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the processing of step S21TM3710 and subsequent steps shown in FIG. 10B is executed. When the RAM clear processing is executed, the fact that the RAM clear is executed is notified. Further, in this example, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The unpaid amount data stored in the unpaid amount storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines that the payout operation is to be performed. When possible, the PRDY signal is turned on. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a when the connection confirmation signal is turned on. If not, the PRDY signal is turned on.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected does not depend on whether the setting change mode is controlled, or whether the setting confirmation mode is controlled. No, the payout of the game medium is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By not maintaining the PRDY signal in the ON state but in the OFF state, the ball lending process is not executed. In this way, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the game clerk usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed, and then, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. In order to make the closed state, even if the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in the ON state (from step S21TM1480), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a It may be open. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. Therefore, the PRDY signal is turned off.

  When the store clerk at the game arcade closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal in the ON state (setting change mode or setting confirmation mode processing). The game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 does not detect any open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, and the PRDY signal is turned on. And

  In this example, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on), the payout control is performed. In the microcomputer 21TM370, the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is not cleared (because there are remaining game media to be paid), Based on the PRDY signal being turned on, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid amount storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. One by one until the data of the unpaid coin number becomes 0 performs a payout operation. As a result, the game medium that has been interrupted due to the occurrence of power failure, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Payment is completed. In this way, when the power supply is cut off during the execution of the ball lending and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the data of the unpaid number is not cleared when the power is restored thereafter, and the setting is also made. On condition that the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the suspended payout of the game medium is restarted to complete the ball lending. Is possible.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (2), when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on). In this case, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has cleared the data of the unpaid quantity stored in the unpaid quantity storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining payouts to be paid out). Because there is no game medium), even when the PRDY signal is turned on, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not formed in the backup area in the RAM21TM302 accordingly. The unpaid quantity data stored in the payout quantity storage buffer is initialized. As described above, when the power is turned on, the clear switch 21TM052 is operated to initialize the data of the unpaid number. Therefore, before the power is cut off (the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is restored). Among the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process that was executed before (that is, the number of payouts specified from the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the payout has not been paid out. No payout is made for the number of payouts.

  Therefore, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the data of the unpaid number stored in the RAM21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is accompanied with this. Is initialized, it is possible to simplify management of data of a predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process or the prize ball process.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption during the execution of the ball lending process, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the unpaid number storage formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is stored. The unpaid number of data will be stored in the buffer. Here, when the power is turned on, the clear switch 21TM052 is operated to clear the data of the unpaid number, so that the interrupted payout is forcibly terminated (stopped) without being restarted. That is, when the power is restored, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the unpaid amount is not paid out.

(Variation example of ball lending process (switch to setting change mode) when power failure occurs)
FIG. 10-8 (1) is a block diagram showing a connection example of the RAM clear signal line in the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and the main board 11, and the clear switch 21TM052a and the payout control board 21TM037. In the example shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), the above-described clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is provided corresponding to the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), and corresponds to the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, another clear switch 21TM052a different from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is provided. That is, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 are provided with independent clear switches.

  When the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is input to the I / O 105 of the game control microcomputer 100. When the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052a is input to the I / O 21TM372f of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  When the game clerk initializes the game control microcomputer 100 and does not initialize the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch is turned on. The 21TM052a is turned off. On the contrary, when the gaming control microcomputer 100 is not initialized but the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off when the power is turned on. The switch 21TM052a is turned on. When the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized, the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is turned on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch 21TM052a is also turned on. And

  Next, regarding the processing when the payout is interrupted due to a power failure occurring while the ball lending is being executed, and the processing is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, FIG. Will be specifically described. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, and the clear switch 21TM052a is turned on when the power is turned on. By being operated, the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized. In the example shown in FIG. 10-8 (2), when the power supply is cut off while executing the payout of the game medium, the payout under execution is stopped, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored. Sometimes, the payout is restarted based on the fact that the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished without restarting the payout. ..

  FIG. 10-8 (2) shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. It is a timing chart for explaining the communication processing performed between (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

  When power is cut off during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. It That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 and suspends the payout of the game medium based on the fact that the EXS signal is turned off. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the clerk at the game arcade turns the power switch 21TM055 on after the game machine frame 3 is opened. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (and further to initialize the game control microcomputer 100), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. Also, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. In order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, the lock switch 21TM051 is controlled to be in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  After that, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal but turns it off even if the VL signal is in the on state, that is, even if it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 is based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, and the payout control is performed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state, instead of keeping it in the ON state, based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is OFF, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all OFF, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing is being executed, the payout of the game medium is not executed even if the data of the unpaid number is not cleared.

  After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the processing of step S21TM3710 and subsequent steps shown in FIG. 10B is executed. In addition, when the RAM clear process in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the fact that the RAM clear is executed is notified. Further, in the present example, when the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is operated when the power is turned on, a RAM clear signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is provided. The data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines that the payout operation is to be performed. When possible, the PRDY signal is turned on. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a when the connection confirmation signal is turned on. If not, the PRDY signal is turned on.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected does not depend on whether the setting change mode is controlled, or whether the setting confirmation mode is controlled. No, the payout of the game medium is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By not maintaining the PRDY signal in the ON state but in the OFF state, the ball lending process is not executed. In this way, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the game clerk usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed, and then, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. In order to make the closed state, even if the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in the ON state (from step S21TM1480), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a It may be open. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. Therefore, the PRDY signal is turned off.

  When the clerk at the game arcade closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal in the ON state, and the gaming machine frame / door frame is opened. Based on the fact that the sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal is turned on.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (2), when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated when the power is turned on). ), When RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at power-on)). However, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has cleared the data of the unpaid quantity stored in the unpaid quantity storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. Because (because there are remaining game media to be paid out), the PRDY signal is turned on, and based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to perform the payout operation one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes 0. As a result, the game medium that has been interrupted due to the occurrence of power failure, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Payment is completed. In this way, when the power supply is cut off during the execution of the ball lending and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the data of the unpaid number is not cleared when the power is restored thereafter, and the setting is also made. On condition that the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the suspended payout of the game medium is restarted to complete the ball lending. Is possible.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a backup in the RAM 21TM302. When the PRDY signal is turned on because the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the area has been cleared (because there are no remaining game media to be paid) Also, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, and the payout operation is not performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to the game control microcomputer 100, but is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not done. Therefore, even if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated, the payout is performed. If the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the control board 21TM037 is not operated, the data of the unpaid quantity stored in the unpaid quantity storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is Not initialized. In this way, whether or not the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on (whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed) However, if the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated, the data of the unpaid quantity is not initialized and is executed before the power is cut off (before the power supply is restored to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). Among the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process (that is, the number of payouts designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the number of unpaid amounts not paid out , The payout will be executed.

  Therefore, regardless of whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the data of the unpaid amount stored in the RAM21TM302 is not initialized, so the ball lending is performed. It is possible to appropriately protect the data of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the processing or the prize ball processing.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption during the execution of the ball lending process, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the unpaid number storage formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is stored. The unpaid number of data will be stored in the buffer. Here, even if the clear switch 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated when the power is turned on, if the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is not operated, the data of the unpaid quantity is not cleared and is maintained. Therefore, the suspended payout is restarted, and the payout of the unpaid number of game media is completed. That is, after the power is restored, a period of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is passed, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the unpaid amount is paid out.

  In this embodiment, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the detection signal of the open state is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is not limited to such a configuration, and may be provided on the main board 11 (the detection signal of the open state is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In the case of such a configuration, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is based on that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Then, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped (switched from the ON state to the OFF state). As a result, when the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns off the PRDY signal or does not turn on the EXS signal, so that the ball lending is executed. Try not to be done.

(Limitation on prize ball payout based on detection of open state of game machine frame or glass door frame)
Next, a method for limiting the payout of prize balls when the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state and the glass door frame 3a is in the open state will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 10-9. FIG. 10-9 is a game control microcomputer when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is a timing diagram showing transmission and reception of signals between the computer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. As shown in FIG. 10-9, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal is transmitted again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the reception time. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

  At this time, when a clerk or the like in the game arcade opens the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door. The open state of the frame 3a is detected. In the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (and in the case where the glass door frame 3a and the upper plate are integrated, the glass door frame 3a is opened), the prize ball to be paid out Since the path through which the prize balls flow down is not physically connected to the upper plate that stores the flowing down prize balls, if the prize balls are paid out in this state, the game medium reaches the upper plate. It falls without doing it.

  In the example of FIG. 10-9, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the game control is performed. The microcomputer 100 for use has detected the passage of the game medium relating to any one of the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, and the special winning opening. Based on the above, a prize ball number command as a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, but the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Then, the payout control of the game medium is not executed, and the prize ball preparing command as the received ACK signal is issued to the game control microcomputer 100. To send. This award ball preparation command is until the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Transmission to the game control microcomputer 100 is continued until it is closed.

  As described above, while the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming medium is at each winning opening. Even if the winning award is detected after passing through, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 and does not execute the prize ball payout control. In this way, it is possible not to execute the payout control of the game medium by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, a prize ball preparing command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  Then, a clerk or the like in the game hall closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a in order to put the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a playable state, whereby the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is provided. The provided gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is in a state in which neither the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 nor the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. With the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a both closed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 drives the payout motor 21TM289 when the payout operation is possible, and the gaming machine frame 3 or glass. The payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls (the number designated by the prize ball number command) according to the winning within the period in which the open state of the door frame 3a is detected is executed. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, which has paid out a predetermined number of game media, transmits a prize ball end command as a reception ACK signal.

(Resumption of prize ball payout after completion of open state detection)
Next, the payout is interrupted because the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened while the prize balls are paid out, and then the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a The processing in the closed state will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 10-10. In the example shown in FIG. 10-10, based on the fact that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state while the game medium is being paid out. , The payout of the game medium is interrupted, and the interrupted payout is restarted based on the fact that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is no longer in the open state (becomes in the closed state).

  As shown in FIG. 10-10, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal is transmitted again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the time of reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a winning when the connection confirmation communication process is not being executed (from receiving the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal until transmitting the connection confirmation command as the award ball request signal), the game is played. The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of award balls in the award ball request signal, and transmits the award ball number command as the set award ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receipt of the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 dispenses the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command. The gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened and the gaming machine frame / door frame provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is provided while paying out the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command. Based on the opening sensor 21TM300 detecting the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 and interrupts the payout of the game medium. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  This unpaid number is updated based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the unpaid number is a payout number count switch from the predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, the payout number designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14). It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by the 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

  In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control of the game medium is not executed, and the prize ball preparing command as the received ACK signal is used for the game control. It is transmitted to the microcomputer 100. This award ball preparation command is until the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Transmission to the game control microcomputer 100 is continued until it is closed.

  As described above, during the period when the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 even while the game medium is being paid out. Does not execute payout of game media. Then, a prize ball preparing command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door When it is detected that the open state of the frame 3a has ended), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to operate based on the fact that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. The payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the stored contents of the unpaid quantity storage buffer, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid quantity becomes zero. As a result, the payout of the game medium, which has been interrupted by the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, is completed.

(Prize ball processing at the time of power failure (without changing to the setting change mode))
Next, referring to FIG. 10-11, regarding the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption during the payout of the prize balls and the control is not controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored. It will be specifically described. In the example shown in FIGS. 10 to 11, the game medium payout is interrupted based on that the power is cut off while the game medium is being paid out, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is turned on. Instead, after the connection confirmation signal is turned on and the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the suspended payout is restarted.

  As shown in FIG. 10-11, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal is transmitted again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the time of reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a winning when the connection confirmation communication process is not being executed (from receiving the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal until transmitting the connection confirmation command as the award ball request signal), the game is played. The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of award balls in the award ball request signal, and transmits the award ball number command as the set award ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receipt of the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 dispenses the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command. During the period of paying out the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command, when the power is cut off, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the game is played. Discontinue delivery of media. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the clerk at the game arcade turns the power switch 21TM055 on after the game machine frame 3 is opened. At this time, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is further operated. After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, the processing after step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. 10-1 is executed without being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the lock switch 21TM051 being in the OFF state when the power is turned on. Shall be. Here, until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) illustrated in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the payout motor 21TM289 in the stopped state because the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. As a result, after the power is turned on, the CPU 103 is executing a predetermined process that is a process at the time of turning on the power (after the power is turned on, the serial number shown in FIG. Since the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped during the communication circuit setting process (the period until the step S21TM1480) is executed, the state in which the payout of the game medium is suspended is maintained.

  As a result, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, the period in which the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state (from power-on to the serial communication circuit setting process (step Until the execution of S21TM1480)), the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10-1, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines that the payout operation is to be performed. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the content of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. To do. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. It is assumed that the payout motor 21TM289 is driven and the payout operation is performed on the condition that the payout operation is not performed.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected does not depend on whether the setting change mode is controlled, or whether the setting confirmation mode is controlled. No, the payout of the game medium is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the prize ball process is not executed. Thus, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  In addition, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the game clerk usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed and then opens the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Since it is in the closed state, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in the open state even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (from step S21TM1480). In such a case, even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. The game medium is not paid out.

  When the store clerk at the game arcade closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal in the ON state, and the gaming machine frame / door frame is opened. Based on the fact that the sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are stored. Based on this, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes 0. As a result, the supply of the game medium, which has been interrupted due to the occurrence of power failure and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a thereafter, is completed. In this way, when the power is cut off during the payout of the prize balls and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed when the power is restored thereafter. On that condition, it is possible to restart the suspended game medium payout and complete the prize ball payout.

(Prize ball processing when power failure occurs (moves to setting change mode))
Next, regarding the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption occurring while the prize balls are being executed, and the process is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, refer to FIGS. It will be specifically described by using. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), when the power is turned on, the clear switch 21TM052 is operated, so that the RAM clear signal is sent to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Shall be sent. In the example shown in FIGS. 10-12, when the power is cut off while the game medium is being paid out, the current payout is stopped, and when the power is restored and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, The payout is not restarted, and even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the payout is not restarted based on the execution of the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-12, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal is transmitted again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the time of reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a winning when the connection confirmation communication process is not being executed (from receiving the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal until transmitting the connection confirmation command as the award ball request signal), the game is played. The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of award balls in the award ball request signal, and transmits the award ball number command as the set award ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receipt of the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 dispenses the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command. During the period of paying out the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command, when the power is cut off, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the game is played. Discontinue delivery of media. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the clerk at the game arcade turns the power switch 21TM055 on after the game machine frame 3 is opened. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (further to initialize the pachinko gaming machine 1), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and The clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. In order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, the lock switch 21TM051 is controlled to be in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  After that, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the payout motor 21TM289 in a stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, a period during which the CPU 103 is executing a predetermined process that is a process at the time of turning on the power (controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. Until the execution of)), the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is in a stopped state, so that the state in which the payout of the game medium is interrupted is maintained even if the data of the unpaid number is not cleared. It will be.

  After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the processing of step S21TM3710 and subsequent steps shown in FIG. 10B is executed. When the RAM clear processing is executed, the fact that the RAM clear is executed is notified. Further, in this example, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The unpaid amount data stored in the unpaid amount storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10-1, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines that the payout operation is to be performed. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid amount storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid amount becomes zero. I do. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. It is assumed that the payout motor 21TM289 is driven and the payout operation is performed on the condition that the payout operation is not performed.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected does not depend on whether the setting change mode is controlled, or whether the setting confirmation mode is controlled. No, the payout of the game medium is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the prize ball process is not executed. Thus, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk at the game arcade usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed, and then confirms that the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Therefore, even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (step S21TM1480 and thereafter), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in the open state. In such a case, even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It becomes a state.

  When the store clerk at the game arcade closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal in the ON state (setting change mode or setting confirmation mode processing). And the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 does not detect any open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, and drives the payout motor 21TM289. Let

  In this example, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on), the payout control is performed. In the microcomputer 21TM370, the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is not cleared (because there are remaining game media to be paid), Based on the content of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven, and the unpaid number data becomes 0 one by one. Carry out the work. As a result, the game medium that has been interrupted due to the occurrence of power failure, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Payment is completed. In this way, when the power is cut off during the payout of the prize balls and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the data of the unpaid number is not cleared when the power is restored thereafter, and , If the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, the suspended payment of the game medium is restarted and the prize balls are paid out. Can be completed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-12, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on). Since the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has cleared the data of the unpaid amount stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining game media to be paid out are Since it does not exist), the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not formed in the backup area in the RAM21TM302 accordingly. The unpaid quantity data stored in the payout quantity storage buffer is initialized. As described above, when the power is turned on, the clear switch 21TM052 is operated to initialize the data of the unpaid number. Therefore, before the power is cut off (the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is restored). Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out (that is, the number of payouts designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14) to be paid out in the award ball processing executed before), the payout has not been paid out. No payout is made for the number of payouts.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption during the execution of the prize ball process, the unpaid number storage formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is stored. The unpaid number of data will be stored in the buffer. Here, when the power is turned on, the clear switch 21TM052 is operated to clear the data of the unpaid number, so that the interrupted payout is forcibly terminated (stopped) without being restarted. That is, when the power is restored, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the unpaid amount is not paid out.

(Modified example regarding prize ball processing (switch to setting change mode) when power failure occurs)
Next, regarding the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption occurring while the payout of the prize balls is being performed and the power supply is restored to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, FIG. It will be specifically described by using. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, and the clear switch 21TM052a is turned on when the power is turned on. By being operated, the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized. In the example shown in FIGS. 10 to 13, when the power is cut off while the game medium is being paid out, the current payout is stopped, and when the power is restored and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, The payout is restarted based on the fact that the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends without restarting the payout.

  As shown in FIG. 10-13, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal is transmitted again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the time of reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a winning when the connection confirmation communication process is not being executed (from receiving the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal until transmitting the connection confirmation command as the award ball request signal), the game is played. The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of award balls in the award ball request signal, and transmits the award ball number command as the set award ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receipt of the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 dispenses the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command. During the period of paying out the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command, when the power is cut off, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the game is played. Discontinue delivery of media. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the clerk at the game arcade turns the power switch 21TM055 on after the game machine frame 3 is opened. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (and further to initialize the game control microcomputer 100), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. Also, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. In order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, the lock switch 21TM051 is controlled to be in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  After that, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the payout motor 21TM289 in a stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, a period during which the CPU 103 is executing a predetermined process that is a process at the time of turning on the power (controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. Until the execution of)), the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is in a stopped state, so that the state in which the payout of the game medium is interrupted is maintained even if the data of the unpaid number is not cleared. It will be.

  After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the processing of step S21TM3710 and subsequent steps shown in FIG. 10B is executed. In addition, when the RAM clear process in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the fact that the RAM clear is executed is notified. Further, in the present example, when the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is operated when the power is turned on, a RAM clear signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is provided. The data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10-1, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines that the payout operation is to be performed. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid amount storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid amount becomes zero. I do. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. It is assumed that the payout motor 21TM289 is driven and the payout operation is performed on the condition that the payout operation is not performed.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected does not depend on whether the setting change mode is controlled, or whether the setting confirmation mode is controlled. No, the payout of the game medium is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the prize ball process is not executed. Thus, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the game clerk usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed, and then, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. In order to make the closed state, even if the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in the ON state (from step S21TM1480), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a It may be open. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. Based on this, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped.

  When the store clerk at the game arcade closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal in the ON state, and the gaming machine frame / door frame is opened. The sensor 21TM300 starts driving the payout motor 21TM289 based on the fact that neither the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a is detected.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (2), when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated when the power is turned on). ), When RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at power-on)). However, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has cleared the data of the unpaid quantity stored in the unpaid quantity storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. Therefore (because there are remaining game media to be paid out), the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and The payout operation is performed one by one until the data becomes 0. As a result, the game medium that has been interrupted due to the occurrence of power failure, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Payment is completed. In this way, when the power is cut off during the payout of the prize balls and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the data of the unpaid number is not cleared when the power is restored thereafter, and , If the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, the suspended payment of the game medium is restarted and the prize balls are paid out. Can be completed.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a backup in the RAM 21TM302. Since the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the area is cleared (because there is no remaining game medium to be paid), the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout is performed. No action is taken.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to the game control microcomputer 100, but is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not done. Therefore, even if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated, the payout is performed. If the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the control board 21TM037 is not operated, the data of the unpaid quantity stored in the unpaid quantity storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is Not initialized. In this way, whether or not the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on (whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed) However, if the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated, the data of the unpaid quantity is not initialized and is executed before the power is cut off (before the power supply is restored to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the award ball processing (that is, the number of payouts designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14), the number of unpaid amounts not paid out , The payout will be executed.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption during the execution of the prize ball process, the unpaid number storage formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is stored. The unpaid number of data will be stored in the buffer. Here, even if the clear switch 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated when the power is turned on, if the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is not operated, the data of the unpaid quantity is not cleared and is maintained. Therefore, the suspended payout is restarted, and the payout of the unpaid number of game media is completed. That is, after the power is restored, a period of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is passed, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the unpaid amount is paid out.

  In this embodiment, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the detection signal of the open state is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is not limited to such a configuration, and may be provided on the main board 11 (the detection signal of the open state is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In the case of such a configuration, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is based on that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Thus, even if a winning is detected, the prize ball number command is not transmitted. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 based on the fact that the prize ball number command is no longer received, so that the payout of prize balls is not executed.

(Output period of security signal and signal corresponding to setting change)
As described above, in the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), the security signal can be output from the tenth terminal. By this security signal, as described above, the possibility that initialization processing (RAM clear), fraudulent activity detection, game stop target error detection, or the like has been performed can be notified to the outside. In addition, the security signal, until the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started and the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and shifts to the normal game processing (for example, FIG. 10-1 and FIG. From step S21TM3510 shown in 10-2, until it is determined as NO in step S21TM3060 or step S21TM3070 and the normal game process is executed), it is turned on.

  In the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), the setting change corresponding signal can be output from the seventh terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is from the start of the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode to the end of the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and the shift to the normal game processing (for example, FIG. 10-1 and FIG. From step S21TM3510 shown in 10-2, until it is determined as NO in step S21TM3060 or step S21TM3070 and the normal game process is executed), it is turned on. With this setting change corresponding signal, it is possible to notify the outside that the process related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been executed (the process related to the change or confirmation of the set value has been executed). Further, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends (when shifting to the normal game processing), the setting change corresponding signal output from the 7th terminal is turned off once, and then from the same 7th terminal of the RAM 102. Since the number of pulse-like setting change correspondence signals corresponding to the current set value stored in the set value storage area are output, the set value can be notified to the outside.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (1), when the mode is changed to the setting change mode accompanied by the RAM clear (for example, step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 shown in FIG. 10-1) when the power is turned on, A setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the fact that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the security signal is kept in the ON state for 30 seconds even after the setting change mode ends and the process shifts to the normal game process. Also, with the completion of the setting change mode (to be exact, at the timing when 50 ms has elapsed after the setting change mode has ended and the process has shifted to the normal game processing), the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off, Based on the fact that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is 2, two pulses are output as the special mode setting change corresponding signal.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (2), the RAM clear (for example, step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 shown in FIG. 10-1) was executed when the power was turned on, but the setting change mode was not entered. In this case, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on (when RAM is cleared), but the setting change corresponding signal is not turned on.

  As described above, the security signal remains in the ON state during the period in which the security signal is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, even if the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and is configured not to execute the process based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, at least based on the input of the security signal. Thus, it is possible to recognize that the control may have been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-15 (3) and (4), the setting change corresponding signal is in the ON state when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended. (To be precise, at the timing when 50 ms has elapsed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended and the process has shifted to the normal game processing), it is turned off. Regarding the security signal as well, it is turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, but when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed as shown in FIG. 10-15 (3). Does not immediately turn off after the setting change mode ends, and remains on for 30 seconds after the setting change mode ends. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (4), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is not executed, when the setting confirmation mode ends (to be exact, the setting confirmation mode ends). Then, at the timing when 50 ms elapses after shifting to the normal game processing, it is turned off.

  In addition, in either case of (3) and (4) in FIG. 10-15, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (correctly, setting change). The setting value is stored in the RAM 102 after the mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game process is started, and the state becomes OFF at the timing when 50 ms has elapsed), and thereafter (for example, after 50 ms or more has elapsed) Based on the fact that the set value stored in the area is 2, two pulses are output as the special mode setting change corresponding signal. This makes it possible to easily specify the setting value of each gaming machine in an external device such as a hall computer.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (2), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed and the mode is not shifted to the setting change mode, the security signal is the power-on time (RAM It will be in the ON state for 30 seconds after the execution of clear.

  Therefore, on the external device side to which the security signal is input, when the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, but the setting change mode is not entered. It is possible to recognize that there is a possibility that On the other hand, when the input period of the security signal exceeds 30 seconds, there is a possibility that the mode has changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (in particular, there is a high possibility that the mode has changed to the setting change mode accompanied by RAM clear). If the security signal input period does not reach 30 seconds, the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) may not have been executed and the setting confirmation mode may have been entered. It is possible to recognize that (only the confirmation may have been performed without changing the setting value).

  In other words, when the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) was executed, but it is possible that the mode did not shift to the setting change mode. If it is recognizable by the management device and the input period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) may not have been executed and the setting confirmation mode may have been entered. If the management device can recognize that (only the confirmation may have been performed without changing the set value), and the security signal input period exceeds 30 seconds, , The setting may have changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. (Especially, it is likely that the transition to the setting change mode with RAM clear) and is recognizable in the management device. In this way, it is possible to distinguish what control the game machine has executed on the outside by the output period of the security signal of the game machine.

  Therefore, even if the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and is configured not to execute the process based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, at least based on the input of the security signal. Thus, the possibility that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has been executed and the possibility that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been controlled can be distinguished and recognized.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode, the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state when the power is turned on, so the RAM clear is always executed (step S21TM3050). Alternatively, step S21TM3150). As a result, the output period of the security signal is about 30 seconds while being controlled in the setting change mode. On the other hand, when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state and the RAM clear flag is 0 when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM3570). RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is not executed. As a result, the security signal output period is the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled (more precisely, the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled + about 50 ms).

  In this way, since the security signal output period is different between when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode and when it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, each gaming machine changes the setting on the external device side. It is possible to distinguish and specify whether the mode is controlled or the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the setting change corresponding signal is turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends (to be exact, the setting change mode Or, at the timing of 50 ms after the setting confirmation mode is finished and the game process is shifted to the normal game processing, it is turned off. Therefore, on the external device side, the control period for the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be specified by the input period of the setting change corresponding signal. If the input period of the security signal is longer than the input period of the setting change corresponding signal by about 30 seconds, it is recognized that the setting change mode is controlled and the RAM clear is executed accordingly. It is possible, and when the input period of the setting change corresponding signal and the input period of the security signal are the same period, it can be recognized that the setting confirmation mode is controlled without the RAM clear.

  In this way, the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal are output from different output terminals, so that the external device to which these signals are input has a predetermined event (RAM clear in this example) in the game machine. It is possible to distinguish between the occurrence of and the fact that the gaming machine is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Then, the control period for the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be clearly specified, and which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is controlled can be specified based on the input period of the security signal.

  Next, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 was in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 was in the OFF state when the power was turned on, the setting was confirmed without the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). The setting confirmation mode ends because the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in less than 50 ms after the mode is switched to and the setting confirmation mode is started (for example, after the setting change flag is set in step S21TM3510). Then, it is assumed that the normal game processing is started.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (5), the setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal from the timing when the setting confirmation mode is started, and at the same time, the security signal is output from the 10th terminal. Is output. And, even if it is less than 50 ms after the setting confirmation mode is started and the setting confirmation mode is ended (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state) to shift to the normal game processing, at least a period of 50 ms or more, The setting change correspondence signal and the security signal are continuously output. That is, once the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are turned on, the on state is maintained for at least 50 ms.

  If the period during which the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are in the ON state is less than a predetermined period (50 ms in this example), on the external device side such as a hall computer, the pachinko gaming machine 1 confirms the setting change mode or the setting confirmation. It becomes difficult to recognize that the mode has been entered. As in the present embodiment, the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are turned on for at least a predetermined period (50 ms in this example) regardless of the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. On the external device side, each pachinko gaming machine 1 can recognize that it has shifted to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Regarding the setting change correspondence signal, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the setting change correspondence signal is output in a special mode with a pulse width of 100 ms, so that each pachinko machine can be operated by the external device such as a hall computer. The set value of the gaming machine 1 can be specified and managed. If the period under control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is less than 50 ms, the setting change corresponding signal is turned on and then switched to the off state in less than 50 ms. When the number of pulses corresponding to the set value stored in the storage area and having a width of 100 ms is output, the period in which the external device is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (less than 50 ms) It is not possible to recognize the setting change corresponding signal corresponding to, and by recognizing only the setting change corresponding signal of the special mode (pulse width of 100 ms) output thereafter, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is incorrect. May be recognized as As in the present embodiment, regardless of the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the setting change correspondence signal is turned on for at least a predetermined period (50 ms in this example), so that the external device side Thus, the set value of each pachinko gaming machine 1 can be specified accurately.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 Game effect lamp 10 General prize hole 11 Main board 12 Production control board 13 Voice control board 14 Lamp control board 15 Relay board 20 Normal pattern display 21 Gate switch 22A, 22B Start opening Switch 23 Count switch 30 Hit ball operation handle 31A Stick controller 31B Push button 32 Movable body 100 Game control microcomputers 101, 121 ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuits 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (2)

A gaming machine which can be controlled by a probability according to a set value in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
An assigning unit that is capable of imparting a game value based on the fact that the game medium has entered a specific area, and is capable of imparting a game value based on a signal output from the gaming device,
And a setting mode control means capable of controlling the setting value to a setting mode capable of setting,
In response to the start of the control of the setting mode, start outputting a specific signal,
Stopping the output of the specific signal in response to the end of the control of the setting mode,
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the control of the setting mode is longer than a predetermined period,
When the game medium is controlled to the setting mode, the addition of the game value due to the game medium entering the specific area is restricted,
A gaming machine characterized in that, while being controlled to the setting mode, the granting of a gaming value based on a signal output from the gaming device is restricted. A gaming machine which can be controlled by a probability according to a set value in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
An assigning unit that is capable of imparting a game value based on the fact that the game medium has entered a specific area, and is capable of imparting a game value based on a signal output from the gaming device,
And a setting mode control means capable of controlling the setting value to a setting mode capable of setting,
In response to the start of the control of the setting mode, start outputting a specific signal,
Stopping the output of the specific signal in response to the end of the control of the setting mode,
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the control of the setting mode is longer than a predetermined period,
When the game medium is controlled to the setting mode, the addition of the game value due to the game medium entering the specific area is restricted,
A gaming machine, wherein a gaming value can be added based on a signal output from the gaming device when being controlled in the setting mode.

Images